BLU-RAY DISC & HDD RECORDER
SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US/
SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU/
SR-HD1700ER/SR-HD1700AG
INSTRUCTIONS
HDD
REC
BD
REC
OPEN/
CLOSE
REC
MODE
INPUT
SELECT
MEDIA SELECT
BD/SD
ONE TOUCH
DUBBING
STANDBY/ON
RESET
HDD
STOP
REV
PLAY
FWD
PAUSE
REC
HDV/DV IN
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which is located
Please read the following before getting started:
on the body. Retain this information for future reference.
Thank you for purchasing this product.
Model No.
Serial No.
Before operating this unit, please read the instructions carefully
to ensure the best possible performance.
LST1562-001A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precaution
CAUTION:
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1) Read these instructions.
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-
type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
obsolete outlet.
10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
"This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense."
When the equipment is installed in a cabinet or a shelf, make sure
that it has sufficient space on all sides to allow for ventilation
(10cm or more on both sides, on top and at the rear).
12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-
over.
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws governing the disposal of
these batteries must be followed strictly.
Use the supplied power cord.
(If not, fire or electric shock may be caused.)
DON'T continue to operate the equipment if you are in any doubt
about it working normally, or if it is damaged in any way^switch
off, withdraw the mains plug and consult your dealer.
DO be careful with glass panels or doors on equipment.
DO consult you dealer if you are ever in doubt about the
installation, operation or safety of your equipment.
NEVER let anyone especially children push anything into holes,
slots or any other opening in the case^this could result in a fatal
electrical shock.
13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods
of time.
14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
Failure to heed the following precautions may result in
damage to the unit, remote control or disc/cassette.
1. DO NOT place the unit ^
MOISTURE CONDENSATION
Moisture in the air will condense on the unit when you move it from
a cold place to a warm place, or under extremely humid
conditions^just as water droplets form on the surface of a glass
filled with cold liquid. In conditions where condensation may occur,
disconnect the unit’s power plug from the wall and keep it
disconnected for a few hours to let the moisture dry, then turn on
the unit.
^ in an environment prone to extreme temperatures or
humidity.
^ in direct sunlight.
^ in a dusty environment.
^ in an environment where strong magnetic fields are
generated.
^ on a surface that is unstable or subject to vibration.
2. DO NOT block the unit’s ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
3. DO NOT place heavy objects on the unit or remote control.
4. DO NOT place anything which might spill on top of the unit
or remote control.
(If water or liquid is allowed to enter this equipment, fire or
electric shock may be caused.)
5. DO NOT expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing.
6. DO NOT use this equipment in a bathroom or places with
water. Also DO NOT place any containers filled with water or
liquids (such as cosmetics or medicines, flower vases, potted
plants, cups, etc.) on top of this unit.
7. DO NOT place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
8. AVOID violent shocks to the unit during transport.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precaution
DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY
JVC shall not be liable for any loss relating to the unit’s failure to
properly record, store or playback any content (video, audio or
otherwise) for any reason whatsoever. Any applicable warranties
shall only cover replacement or repair of the effected unit, and shall
not apply to recovery or replacement of lost content.
● Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
● For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured
under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
ATTENTION:
Using a mobile phone in the vicinity of the unit may cause
picture vibration on the TV screen or change the screen to a
black back display.
Some TVs or other appliances generate strong magnetic
fields. Do not place such appliances on top of the unit as it
may cause picture disturbance.
When moving the product, press A to turn off the power,
and wait at least 30 seconds before unplugging the power
cord. Then, wait at least 2 minutes before moving the
product.
If there is a power outage when using the unit, the recorded
data may be erased.
It is recommended to back up discs which contain important
recordings periodically (every few years). As digital signals
do not deteriorate, failure to play back or record might arise
due to the effects of the disc aging through the years
depending on the storage environment.
Recorded programs and data cannot be restored once the
disc or tape is damaged.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
● This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
● DVD logo is a registered trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
● HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC
in the United States and other countries.
● Blu-ray Disc and the Blu-ray Disc logo are trademarks of Blu-ray
Disc Association.
● This unit can play back and record only NTSC signals.
The hard disk is a consumable item. Replacement is
recommended after 10000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C
environment). For information on maintenance planning and
costs, consult your nearest JVC dealer.
● “x.v.Color” and the “x.v.Color” logo are trademarks of Sony
Corporation Co., Ltd.
● Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
● The SDHC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● i.LINK and the i.LINK logo are trademarks.
● “AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
The fan motor is a consumable item. Replacement is
recommended after 30000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C
environment). For information on maintenance planning and
costs, consult your nearest JVC dealer.
HOW TO USE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL
● All major sections and subsections are listed in the Table Of
Contents on page 8. Use this when searching for information on
a specific procedure or feature.
● The A mark signals a reference to another page for instructions
or related information.
● Operation buttons necessary for the various procedures are
clearly indicated through the use of illustrations at the beginning
of each major section.
●
Windows and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
Mac OS is trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
●
other countries.
● This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license
and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-
commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance
with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”)
and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide
AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any
other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG
LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
BEFORE YOU INSTALL YOUR NEW UNIT . . .
. . . please read the sections/literature listed below.
● “Cautions” on page 2
“IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” on page 3 to 4
Batteries
^Incorrect use of batteries may cause the batteries
to burst or ignite. A leaky battery may corrode the equipment,
dirty your hands or spoil your clothing. In order to avoid these
problems, make sure to observe the precautions below:
● Use the specified batteries only.
● Install the batteries with due attention to the plus (+) and
minus (-) sides of the batteries according to the instructions in
the compartment.
● Do not mix old and new batteries.
● Do not mix batteries of different types. Voltage specifications
of batteries of the same shape may vary.
● Replace an exhausted battery with a new one promptly.
● If you will not use the remote control for a long time, remove
the batteries.
● If leaked battery fluid gets on your skin or clothing, rinse
immediately and thoroughly. If it gets into you eye, bathe your
eye well rather than rubbing and seek medical treatment
immediately. Leaked battery fluid that gets into your eye or
your clothing may cause a skin irritation or damage your eye.
●
Do not put the batteries in a place where young children can reach.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precaution
IMPORTANT:
The rating plate and the safety caution are on the rear of
the unit.
Please read the various precautions on page 5 to 7 before
installing or operating the unit.
It should be noted that it may be unlawful to re-record pre-
recorded tapes,DVDs, or discs without the consent of the
owner of copyright in the sound or video recording,
broadcast or cable programme and in any literary, dramatic,
musical, or artistic work embodied therein.
WARNING : DANGEROUS VOLTAGE INSIDE
WARNING : TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
A UNIT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. HOWEVER THIS
UNIT USES A VISIBLE LASER BEAM WHICH COULD CAUSE
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE IF DIRECTED. BE
SURE TO OPERATE THE UNIT CORRECTLY AS
INSTRUCTED.
When you are not using the unit for a long period of time, it is
recommended that you disconnect the power cord from the
mains outlet.
Dangerous voltage inside. Refer internal servicing to
qualified service personnel. To prevent electric shock or fire
hazard, remove the power cord from the mains outlet prior to
connecting or disconnecting any signal lead or aerial.
The mains plug shall remain readily operable.
WHEN THIS UNIT IS PLUGGED INTO THE WALL OUTLET, DO
NOT PLACE YOUR EYES CLOSE TO THE OPENING OF THE
DISC TRAY AND OTHER OPENINGS TO LOOK INTO THE
INSIDE OF THIS UNIT.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
The STANDBY/ON A button does not completely shut off
mains power from the unit, but switches operating current on and
off. ABB shows electrical power standby and ACB shows ON.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
A warning that an apparatus with CLASS I construction shall be
connected to a MAINS socket outlet with protective earthing
connection.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
REPRODUCTION OF LABELS
WARNING LABEL INSIDE OF THE UNIT
WARNING
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
Main Plug
The Main Plug is used as the disconnect device, the disconnect
device shall remain readily operable
Even if the display window of the unit is unlit, the main power
supply is not cut off unless the power cord is unplugged.
The main power supply for this unit is controlled by inserting or
removing the power plug.
Failure to heed the following precautions may result in
damage to the unit, remote control or disc.
1. DO NOT place the unit ^
^ in an environment prone to extreme temperatures or
humidity.
^ in direct sunlight.
^ in a dusty environment.
^ in an environment where strong magnetic fields are
generated.
This unit apply to the standard AIEC60825-1:2007B for laser
products.
^ on a surface that is unstable or subject to vibration.
2. DO NOT block the unit’s ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
3. DO NOT place heavy objects on the unit or remote control.
4. DO NOT place anything which might spill on top of the unit
or remote control.
(If water or liquid is allowed to enter this equipment, fire or
electric shock may be caused.)
5. DO NOT expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing.
6. DO NOT use this equipment in a bathroom or places with
water. Also DO NOT place any containers filled with water or
liquids (such as cosmetics or medicines, flower vases, potted
plants, cups, etc.) on top of this unit.
Dear Customer,
[European Union]
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic compatibility
and electrical safety.
European representative of JVC KENWOOD Corporation is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Konrad-Adenauer-Allee 1-11
61118 Bad Vilbel
German
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
7. DO NOT place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
8. AVOID violent shocks to the unit during transport.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precaution
Use the supplied power cord.
(If not, fire or electric shock may be caused.)
POWER CONNECTION
The power supply voltage rating of this product is AC 220 –
240 V (For European countries, Asian countries, and United
Kingdom).
DON'T continue to operate the equipment if you are in any doubt
about it working normally, or if it is damaged in any way -- switch
off, with draw the mains plug and consult your dealer.
DO be careful with glass panels or doors on equipment.
DO consult you dealer if you are ever in doubt about the
installation,operation or safety of your equipment.
NEVER let anyone especially children push anything into holes,
slots or any other opening in the case -- this could result in a fatal
electrical shock.
The power cord attached conforms to the following power supply
voltage and countries. Use only the power cord designated to
ensure safety and EMC regulations of each country.
For European and Asian
For United Kingdom:
countries: AC 220 – 240 V
AC 220 – 240 V
MOISTURE CONDENSATION
Moisture in the air will condense on the unit when you move it from
a cold place to a warm place, or under extremely humid
conditions^just as water droplets form on the surface of a glass
filled with cold liquid. In conditions where condensation may occur,
disconnect the unit’s power plug from the wall and keep it
disconnected for a few hours to let the moisture dry, then turn on
the unit.
This plug will fit only into a grounded power outlet. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician
to install the proper outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of
the grounded plug.
● This product should be operated only with the type of power
source indicated on the label. If you are not sure of the type of
power supply of your home, consult your product dealer or
local electric power company.
Batteries -- Incorrect use of batteries may cause the batteries to
burst or ignite. A leaky battery may corrode the equipment, dirty
your hands or spoil your clothing. In order to avoid these
problems, make sure to observe the precautions below:
● Use the specified batteries only.
Warning:
● Do not use the same power cord for AC 120 V as for AC 220 –
240 V. Doing so may cause malfunction, electric shock or fire.
● Install the batteries with due attention to the plus (+) and minus
(-) sides of the batteries according to the instructions in the
compartment.
● Do not mix old and new batteries.
● Do not mix batteries of different types. Voltage specifications
of batteries of the same shape may vary.
Note for United Kingdom power cord only
The plug of United Kingdom power cord has a built-in fuse.
When replacing the fuse, be sure to use only a correctly rated
approved type, re-fit the fuse cover. (Consult your dealer or
qualified personnel.)
How to replace the fuse
Open the fuse compartment with the
blade screwdriver, and replace the
fuse.
● Replace an exhausted battery with a new one promptly.
● If you will not use the remote control for a long time, remove
the batteries.
● If leaked battery fluid gets on your skin or clothing,rinse
immediately and thoroughly. If it gets into you eye, bathe your
eye well rather than rubbing and seek medical treatment
immediately. Leaked battery fluid that gets into your eye or
your clothing may cause a skin irritation or damage your eye.
● Do not put the batteries in a place where young children can
reach.
Fuse
When the equipment is installed in a cabinet or a shelf, make sure
that it has sufficient space on all sides to allow for ventilation
(10 cm or more on both sides, on top and at the rear).
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws governing the disposal of
these batteries must be followed strictly.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precaution
This equipment has been designed and manufactured to meet
international safety standards but, like any electrical
equipment, care must be taken if you are to obtain the best
results and safety is to be assured.
DO read the operating instructions before you attempt to use the
equipment.
DO ensure that all electrical connections (including the mains
plug, extension leads and interconnections between pieces of
equipment) are properly made and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Switch off and withdraw the
mains plug when making or changing connections.
DO consult your dealer if you are ever in doubt about the
installation, operation or safety of your equipment.
DO be careful with glass panels or doors on equipment.
●
●
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured
under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
●
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVD logo is a registered trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC
in the United States and other countries.
Blu-ray Disc and the Blu-ray Disc logo are trademarks of
Blu-ray Disc Association.
“x.v.Colour” and the “x.v.Colour” logo are trademarks of Sony
Corporation Co., Ltd.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
The SDHC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
i.LINK and the i.LINK logo are trademarks.
DON’T continue to operate the equipment if you are in any doubt
about it working normally, or if it is damaged in any
way^switch off, withdraw the mains plug and consult your
dealer.
DON’T remove any fixed cover as this may expose dangerous
voltages.
DON’T leave equipment switched on when it is unattended unless
it is specifically stated that it is designed for unattended
operation or has a standby mode. Switch off using the
switch on the equipment and make sure that your family
knows how to do this. Special arrangements may need to
be made for infirm or handicapped people.
DON’T use equipment such as personal stereos or radios so that
you are distracted from the requirements of road safety. It
is illegal to watch television whilst driving.
DON’T listen to headphones at high volume, as such use can
permanently damage your hearing.
DON’T obstruct the ventilation of the equipment, for example with
curtains or soft furnishings. Overheating will cause
damage and shorten the life of the equipment.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
DON’T use makeshift stands and NEVER fix legs with wood
screws^to ensure complete safety always fit the
manufacturer’s approved stand or legs with the fixings
provided according to the instructions.
DON’T allow electrical equipment to be exposed to rain or moisture.
ABOVE ALL...
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
Windows and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
●
other countries.
^ NEVER let anyone especially children push anything into
holes, slots or any other opening in the case^this could
result in a fatal electrical shock;
^ NEVER guess or take chances with electrical equipment of
any kind^it is better to be safe than sorry!
●
●
Mac OS is trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license
and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and
noncommercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in
compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/
VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-
commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider
licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or
shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be
obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
This unit can play back and record only PAL signals. NTSC
signals can also be played back on the BD/DVD deck.
The hard disk is a consumable item. Replacement is
recommended after 10000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C
environment). For information on maintenance planning and
costs, consult your nearest JVC dealer.
The fan motor is a consumable item. Replacement is
recommended after 30000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C
environment). For information on maintenance planning and
costs, consult your nearest JVC dealer.
DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY
JVC shall not be liable for any loss relating to the unit’s failure to
properly record, store or playback any content (video, audio or
otherwise) for any reason whatsoever. Any applicable warranties
shall only cover replacement or repair of the effected unit, and shall
not apply to recovery or replacement of lost content.
●
ATTENTION:
Using a mobile phone in the vicinity of the unit may cause
picture vibration on the TV screen or change the screen to a
black back display.
Some TVs or other appliances generate strong magnetic
fields. Do not place such appliances on top of the unit as it
may cause picture disturbance.
When moving the product, press A to turn off the power,
and wait at least 30 seconds before unplugging the power
cord. Then, wait at least 2 minutes before moving the
product.
If there is a power outage when using the unit, the recorded
data may be erased.
It is recommended to back up discs which contain important
recordings periodically (every few years). As digital signals
do not deteriorate, failure to play back or record might arise
due to the effects of the disc aging through the years
depending on the storage environment.
Recorded programmes and data cannot be restored once
the disc or tape is damaged.
BEFORE YOU INSTALL YOUR NEW UNIT . . .
. . . please read the sections/literature listed below.
●
“Cautions” on page 5
“ IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” on page 6 to 7
.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Compatible with dual layer 50 GB Blu-ray
discs, and records up to 24 hours of full
high-definition images in a single disc
This unit is also compatible with high capacity dual layer
50 GB Blu-ray discs, and up to 24 hours (AE mode) of full
high-definition images can be recorded in a single disc.
Writing to inexpensive LTH discs is also supported.
Key Features
Professional Blu-ray Disc recorder of the
high-definition era
Copy videos to a Blu-ray Disc in high-definition from a high-
definition camcorder, or down convert the videos and record
them onto DVDs, all without the need for a PC.
The internal hard disk drive enables for easy editing and
dubbing multiple discs.
Authoring menu enables discs to be
created and used industrially such as for
demonstrations
Disc authoring can be used to create discs for industrial use,
such as discs that repeat playback automatically.
Supports direct recording to discs
You can record contents directly to an optical disc (BD-R/RE,
DVD-R/RW).
Equipped with external control RS-232C
terminal (only for SR-HD1700)
This unit is equipped with an RS-232C terminal that allows for
external control using a PC.
Interface with JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
Supports the import of “SP mode” (*1) and “HQ mode” (*2)
files in the MOV format recorded using the JVC ProHD
MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series, or
the MXF format recorded using the JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650. Import to the HDD
and dubbing to discs are supported.
How to Read this Manual
MOV format
About this manual
:
(*1) SP mode
1280x720/60p, 30p, 24p, 1440x1080/60i
(for NTSC)
1280x720/50p, 25p, 1440x1080/50i (for
PAL)
This manual mainly describes operation procedures using the
remote control unit buttons.
v
The buttons on the remote control unit are indicated as
:
(*2) HQ mode
1280x720/60p, 30p, 24p, 1440x1080/60i,
1920x1080/60i, 30p, 24p (for NTSC)
1280x720/50p, 25p, 1440x1080/50i,
1920x1080/50i, 25p (for PAL)
[Button Name].
v
The menu items are indicated as “Menu Item”.
m
Supplementary remarks in the main text
:
Memo States restrictions on the functions or use of this unit.
MXF format
:
:
:
:
Note
States precautions to be taken during operation.
Indicates the page numbers or items to refer to.
(*1) SP mode
1440x1080/60i (for NTSC)
1440x1080/50i (for PAL)
A
(*2) HQ mode
1440x1080/60i, 1920x1080/60i, 30p, 24p
(for NTSC)
1440x1080/50i, 1920x1080/50i, 25p (for
PAL)
Memo:
The displays of operable media are highlighted.
:
:
:
:
HDD
DVD
BD
Hard disk
DVD
Blu-ray disc
SD card
Compatibility with other consumer
camcorders
SD
:
SDHC SDHC Card
:
In addition to AVCHD, HDV and DV, JVC Everio file formats
are also compatible, and digital dubbing can be done.
CD
Music compact disc
:
JPEG JPEG (still picture) file disc
m
Digital interface that allows for camcorder
compatibility
This unit is equipped with USB, SD slots and i.Link input
terminals for connecting the camcorder.
Contents of this manual
All rights reserved by JVC KENWOOD Corporation.
Unauthorized duplication or reprinting of this manual, in
whole or in part, is strictly prohibited.
v
v
Other product names included in this manual are
trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective
companies. Marks such as ™, ® and © have been omitted
in this manual.
Create menu-supported Blu-ray discs
Blu-ray discs can be created using the BDMV (with menu)
format. (*1) BDAV discs can also be created and dubbed
according to the intended use.
This unit also enable users to use an original image as the
background.
v
Illustrated designs, specifications and other contents of this
manual are subject to change for improvement without prior
notice.
:
(*1) Menu cannot be created when recording directly to a
BDMV format disc.
The illustrations of this unit and the settings menu screens
used in this manual are from SR-HD1700.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Disclaimer of compensation for loss or
damage of stored video content
How to Read this Manual
(Continued)
Please note that our company will not be liable for
Refer to the supplied CD-ROM for the Germany, Spanish,
Italian and French GUIDEBOOK.
compensation of the content or any incidental damages in the
event that dubbing or playback cannot be performed properly
for some reasons. The same applies during repair of this unit.
In order to view the GUIDEBOOK, Adobe® Acrobat®
Reader™ or Adobe® Reader® must be installed.
Adobe® Reader® can be loaded from Adobe’s web site:
http://www.adobe.com/
Compatibility with Analog Sunset
v
Video contents that are copyright-protected under the
AACS will not be output from the analog output terminals of
this unit.
Video contents that are not copyright-protected under the
AACS will be output from the analog output terminals of this
unit.
Analog output terminals refer to the [VIDEO OUT] terminal,
[S-VIDEO OUT] terminal, and [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT]
terminals.
Menu operation
Pressing the remote control buttons below calls up the
respective menu screens.
v
v
v
[SET UP], [NAVIGATION], [EDIT], [INFORMATION
CORRECT], [DUBBING], [MEDIA MANAGE]
v
Press any of the [ J / K / H / I ] buttons to move to a
v
specific menu item (yellow item indicated by a small arrow).
v
v
v
Press the [OK] button to confirm the selection.
Press the [RETURN] button to return to the previous screen.
List of Output Resolutions
Simple instructions on the operation procedure may be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Media
Output
Terminal
Content
Output
Protection Resolution
DVD-Video Analog Output
(Component)
Free
CSS
480p (for
NTSC)
576p (for
PAL)
Other Precautionary Notes
Copyright protection
This unit supports copyright protection technologies.
BDMV
Analog Output
(Component)
Free
In HD (for
NTSC)
576p (for
PAL)
Copyrights
According to the copyright law, video or music data that you
AACS
Free
No Output
In HD
v
store must not be used for purposes other than personal
enjoyment without the authorization of the copyright holder.
The copyright protection function prevents copyrighted
BDAV
Analog Output
(Component)
v
AACS
No Output
video images from being saved to equipment such as a
video recorder. This function may also cause deterioration
in the playback picture quality when the data is output to a
monitor through a video recorder. This is not a hardware
malfunction. To play back copyrighted videos, connect this
product directly to the monitor.
v
v
BD contents are assumed to be recorded in the 1080i
format.
CSS is the abbreviation for content scramble system.
v
v
v
Read and understand fully the terms and conditions of all
AACS is the abbreviation for advanced access content
system.
copyright works before using this unit in the correct
manner. Under no circumstances shall JVC KENWOOD
take any responsibility for any infringements of copyright
caused by the customer when using this unit. The customer
shall be responsible for resolving all legal issues regarding
to any copyright infringements.
Handling precautions
m
Do not use the plug or power point with dust
or metallic objects attached to it
Failure to do so may cause short circuit or heating, and
result in fire or electric shock.
Remove the plug once every half a year, and clean it with a
dry cloth.
v
Stored video content and compensation
For discs containing important video content, backup on a
periodic basis (once every few years) is recommended.
Although digital signals do not deteriorate, playback or
dubbing may fail due to aging of the disc resulting from the
storage conditions.
v
v
m
Make use of a power point that allows the
power plug to be inserted or removed easily
Make sure that the plug can be removed immediately in
case an abnormality is found in the unit.
v
v
Recorded data may be lost if power outage occurs while
this unit is being used. It is therefore recommended that
videos stored on the HDD be dubbed to a BD or DVD as
soon as possible in case the HDD breaks down.
Videos or data stored on a BD/DVD, HDD, or SD card
cannot be recovered if the media is damaged.
m
Insert the plug firmly into the power point
Failure to do so may cause short circuit or heating, and
result in fire or electric shock.
v
v
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
m
Do not make use of a power voltage other
than that specified
Doing so may result in fire or electric shock.
SD Cards
v
Precautions for handling SD and SDHC
cards
m
Do not insert or remove the plug with wet
hands
Doing so may result in electric shock.
v
Note:
v
The disc operation display icon appears blinking and
m
Do not touch the plug when there is thunder
or lightning
Doing so may cause electric shock.
“READING” is displayed on the display window when the SD
card is being accessed (such as during dubbing, playback, or
formatting). When access to the SD card is in progress, do not
remove the card or the power plug. Doing so may cause the
SD card to become unusable.
v
m
Do not insert any foreign object into this unit
Doing so may result in fire or electric shock.
v
If the SD card is not usable, reformat the card. If the problem
persists even after reformatting, use a new SD card.
m
Do not dismantle or remodel this unit
This unit consists of high-voltage components. Dismantling
or remodeling the unit may cause fire or electric shock.
v
Do not use or store the card at a place that is subject to static
v
or electrical noise.
v
Inserting the SD card incorrectly may cause this unit or the
m
Request the authorized dealer to inspect the
interior part of the unit once a year
Using this unit with dust accumulated inside may result in fire.
It is particularly effective to perform servicing before the
humid rainy season.
card to malfunction.
v
Our company will not be liable for any damage or loss of the
v
v
stored data due to accidents. (Be sure to back up the data.)
v
Use the card according to the prescribed conditions. Do not
use it at the following locations.
v
Places that are exposed to direct sunlight
m
Do not connect any video cameras that are
not made by JVC to the USB terminal
Doing so may result in malfunction.
v
Places near heat-generating equipment
v
Inside a car that is under the sun with the windows tightly
shut
v
v
Places that are subject to high humidity and corrosion
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
v
Do not bend or drop the card, or subject it to strong impact
or vibration.
v
Do not expose the card to water.
Hard disk drive (HDD)
v
Do not place near devices that emit strong magnetic or
radio waves.
The HDD rotates at a high speed whenever the power is
turned “On”.
Pay particular attention to the following precautions when
using this unit.
v
Do not touch the metal part of the card.
v
The SD SLOT does not support SDXC cards.
v
To use an SDXC card, connect a SDXC-compatible USB
card reader (sold separately) via USB connection.
Warning
v
Do not format the SDXC card to the standard format of the
computer OS.
v
Do not subject it to vibration or strong impact
Subjecting this unit to excessive impact may result in loss of
recorded data and even damage of the HDD.
v
This unit may not recognize the SD card if a USB card
reader with three or more card slots is used.
v
Do not remove the power plug when this unit is running
v
Use a card reader with no more than two card slots.
Shutting down the power when the HDD is running may result
in data loss and even damage of the HDD. Make sure that the
power plug is removed only after turning off the power.
(Wait for the “GOODBYE” message on the display window to
disappear first)
Memo:
v
To dispose a card after erasing all data inside, it is
recommended that this be done using a commercially
available data deletion software, or by destroying the card
physically, such as with a hammer. Formatting or deletion
of data using this unit only changes the file administration
information, and does not erase the data completely.
Formatting the HDD
To format the HDD, perform the following steps.
1
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the
remote control unit
2
Select “FORMAT” from “HDD”
A confirmation screen for formatting the HDD appears.
v
3
Select “YES”
v
The confirmation screen for formatting the HDD reappears.
4
Select “FORMAT”
HDD formatting starts.
v
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
SD Cards (Continued)
Discs
BD video data
BD recording formats
m
You can erase BD Video data from the SD card as follows.
BDAV mode
Videos can be edited (chapter edit etc) and new videos can
be added to the disc. This format is suitable for recording
videos.
v
1
Insert the SD card which has BD video data
stored on it, into the [SD SLOT]
Memo:
v
v
The BD video data cannot be erased if the SD card is write-
MPEG2 with HD quality will be recorded as it is onto the
protected. In this case, turn off the write-protect lock before
inserting the SD card.
disc. This format has low playback compatibility, but
performs well when used for backups.
m
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the
remote control unit
BDMV mode
Compatible and playable on other BD players. Menu
v
3
functions similar to those of DVD video mode are also
included. (*1)
This format performs well for distribution purposes.
Select “BD-VIDEO DATA ERASE” from “SD
CARD”
The confirmation screen for erasing the BD video data is
displayed.
v
:
(*1) Menu cannot be created when recording directly to a
BDMV format disc.
4
Select “ERASE”, and press the [OK] button
The BD video data will be erased.
v
DVD recording formats
m
VR MODE
v
Format the disc using “VR MODE” if you want to add new
videos to the disc.
v
Deleting currently saved videos increases the remaining
space on the disc. (except for the case of DVD-R discs.)
m
VIDEO MODE
v
Format the disc in this mode if you want to play the disc on
a different DVD player.
Formatting of discs
Formatting is required for some disc types. Perform
formatting if this is necessary.
m
When using BD-RE or BD-R discs
Formatting is required. Format the disc using this unit.
v
Format it to the BDAV or BDMV mode.
m
When using DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
Formatting is required. Format the disc using this unit.
v
Format using “VR MODE” or “VIDEO MODE”.
Note:
v
BD-R and DVD-R discs cannot be reformatted. Check the
disc mode before formatting the disc.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Discs that enable both dubbing and
playback
Disc Type
Recording Format
Format
Finalize
Repeated Use
(Reformat)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
BD-RE
BDAV mode
-
-
BDMV mode
BDAV mode
BDMV mode
Video mode
VR mode
ü
BD-R
-
-
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
DVD-RW
DVD-R
Video mode
VR mode
-
-
Memo:
v
This unit does not support the BDXL format.
Discs that enable playback only
Disc Type
Description
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB)
BD-ROM
Supports specific forms of playback, but no recording can be done.
Commercially available Blu-ray discs (movies, music, etc.)
The region code that can be played back on this unit is “*1”.
DVD video
Music CD
Commercially available DVD-Video discs (movies, music, etc.)
The region code that can be played back on this unit is “*2”. The video format used is PAL or NTSC.
CD-DA
DTS music CDs are also playable.
:
*1 SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US/SR-HD1700AG: A, SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU: B, SR-HD1700ER: C
:
*2 SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US: 1, SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU: 2, SR-HD1700AG: 3, SR-HD1700ER: 5
Memo:
v
If 8 cm discs are used, only playback can be performed. The disc cannot be used for recording or editing.
8 cm discs can be used without adapters.
DVD-RAM cartridges and BD-RE are not supported. Take the DVD-RAM out of the cartridge before using it.
v
v
Discs that are not supported
v
DVD-RAM (2.6 GB/5.2 GB)
v
DVD-R (for authoring)
v
CD-ROM/R/RW (PhotoCD, CD-G, VCD etc.)
v
DDCD (1.3 GB, Double Density CD)
v
HDCD (High Density CD)
Memo:
v
To playback a BD or DVD that was created using this unit on another player, finalize the disc.
There is no need for finalizing if the BD-RE disc is recorded using BDAV mode.
If a DVD that was recorded using VR mode has been finalized, the disc can only be played back on VR mode compatible
devices.
To perform high-speed dubbing, make use of a disc that supports high-speed recording.
This unit can play back and record only PAL signals. NTSC signals can also be played back on the BD/DVD deck. (for PAL)
This unit can play back and record only NTSC signals. (for NTSC)
v
v
v
v
v
Note:
v
Do not use disc if the sticker or label is peeled off from the disc surface, if the disc is not round in shape, or if it is significantly
warped or cracked.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Disc storage
Precautions on the Use of
Discs
v
Avoid storing the disc at the following locations.
v
Places that are subject to high humidity, dust, or mold
growth
v
Places that are exposed to direct sunlight or near a
Maintenance of discs
heater
v
Dirt attached to the disc, such as fingerprints and dust, may
v
Inside a car during summer
cause distortion in the video image or sound.
Keep the disc clean at all times such as by using a soft
cloth.
v
Do not drop the disc or subject it to strong impact.
v
Place the disc in a case and store it vertically.
v
Stacking the discs without using a case, placing the discs
against one another or dropping them may result in
deformation or cracking.
v
Wipe the disc lightly from the center outward using the
cloth.
v
If dirt is stubborn, wipe it off using a slightly wet cloth,
followed by a dry cloth.
v
Do not use thinner, benzine, alcohol, conventional record
When the recording/playback lens is dirty
cleaners, or antistatic sprays.
Dust or dirt may be attached to the recording/playback lens
after using this unit for a prolonged period of time, and
recording or playback may not be properly performed as a
result.
Doing so may damage the disc surface.
Handling discs
In such case, consult the dealer or Service Center.
m
Removing a disc
Precautions when playing a dual disc
The side of the dual disc that is not used for DVD recording
does not comply with the standard specifications of music
CDs.
It is recommended that playback on this unit be limited to the
DVD recording side of the dual disc.
m
Keeping a disc
Disc usage
The best performance may not be obtained for some discs.
Power Cable
Do not unplug the cable during recording or playback.
Doing so may cause the disc to become unusable.
If the disc becomes unusable, refer to the following.
m
Correct way to hold a disc
:
BD-R or
DVD-R
Use a new disc.
:
BD-RE or
DVD-RW
Reformat the disc after erasing the data. If the
disc is still not usable, use a new disc.
Do not turn off the [A] button or unplug the power cable
immediately after closing the disc tray.
Do not touch the recording/playback side of the disc
with your fingers.
Fingerprints attached to the surface may affect the
recorded video/audio, and prevent this unit from
operating properly.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
On-screen Displays
Status display
Displays the current settings and operating status (such as
playback, pause) of this unit.
Pressing the [ON SCREEN] button on the remote control
displays the status. To cancel the display, press the [ON
SCREEN] button again.
You can select whether to display the statuses by changing
the settings in the settings menu.
Memo:
v
To display the statuses, set the “ON SCREEN GUIDE” item
on the “DISPLAY” menu screen to “AUTO”.
v
Setting the “ON SCREEN GUIDE” item on the “DISPLAY”
menu screen to “OFF” hides display of all status
information.
v
You can display the status by pressing the [OPTION]
button on the remote control unit when playback, dubbing
or editing is not in progress.
① Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control
unit
② Select “ON-SCREEN DISPLAY”, and press the [OK]
button on the remote control unit
Event display
An on-screen event display appears on the display window as
well as the monitor when there is a misoperation.
v
The event display appears for an interval of about three
seconds.
Memo:
v
The same event display may appear several times.
Alarm display
When an operation is not accepted by this unit, an on-screen
alarm display appears on the display of the main unit as well
as the monitor.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Name and Function of
Parts
Front panel
A
B
C
D
E FG H I J K L M
N
O
P
Q
R
A [ A ] button
Switches operation on or off.
N Playback control buttons
v
[ I ] button
Plays back the data.
B Disc tray
v
[ o ] button
C [ M ] button
Opens/closes the disc tray.
Stops playback/recording.
v
[ O ] button
D Display window
Fast reverses playback.
E Remote control sensor
v
[ N ] button
F [RESET] switch
Reset the unit.
Fast forwards playback.
v
[ W ] button
Pauses playback.
G [REC MODE] button
Switches the recording mode.
O [ R ] button
Starts recording of a title.
H [HDD] lamp
Lights up when in HDD mode.
The [REC] lamp lights up while recording/importing.
P [SD SLOT]
Used for inserting SD cards.
I [INPUT SELECT] button
Switches the external input signals (HDV/DV, L-1).
Q [i.LINK(HDV/DV IN)] terminal
Connect a video camera using i.LINK (HDV/DV. IN).
J [BD] lamp
Lights up when in BD/DVD mode.
The [REC] lamp lights up while recording/dubbing.
R [USB] terminal
Connect a video camera using USB.
K [MEDIA SELECT] button
Switches between HDD and BD/SD.
L [SD] lamp
Lights up when in the SD mode.
M [ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button
Starts one touch dubbing.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
Display window
A
B
C
D
English messages appear for a number of operations.
(Examples)
A HDD/DISC remaining level display
B Dubbing display
:
:
:
HELLO
When the power plug is inserted
When reading the disc
C Disc status display
READING
ONSCREEN
D HDMI output display
Upon moving to the playback navigation
screen
Memo:
v
The brightness of the display window can be adjusted.
Rear panel
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
G [SERIAL COM.(RS-232C)] terminal (only for
SR-HD1700)
A AC inlet
For connecting the power supply.
For connecting to a computer using a serial cable.
B Cooling fan
H [HDMI] terminal
For connecting using an HDMI cable.
C [LAN] terminal
For connecting a LAN cable.
I [S-VIDEO OUT/IN] terminals
For connecting using an S-video cable.
Memo:
v
For SR-HD1350, this terminal functions as a [FOR
J [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminals
For connecting using a component video cable.
SERVICE] terminal. LAN connection is therefore not
supported.
K [REMOTE IN] terminal
For connecting a wired remote control.
D [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)] terminal
For connecting to the amplifier using an optical audio cable.
E [AUDIO OUT/IN] terminals
For connecting using an audio cable.
F [VIDEO OUT/IN] terminals
For connecting using a video cable.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
H [ J / K / H / I ]
The cursor can be moved to select an item.
Name and Function of
Parts (Continued)
I [OPTION]
Displays the option screen.
J [ S ]
Remote control
Move to the chapter just before the current chapter.
K [ O ]
Fast reverses the video and starts slow playback.
A
S
U
L [ R ]
B
T
V
Press the [ R ] and [ I ] buttons together to start recording.
C
M [REC MODE]
For checking the recording mode settings and amount of time
remaining.
D
N [ON SCREEN]
Displays information on the screen.
W
X
Z
E
O [PROGRESSIVE SCAN]
Switches the resolution of the image output.
Y
F
P [AUDIO]
Switches the playback audio.
G
H
Q [EDIT]
Displays the editing menu screen.
a
c
I
b
d
R [MEDIA MANAGE]
Displays the media management menu screen.
J
K
S [ A ]
Switches operation on or off.
e
g
f
h
L
M
T [INPUT SELECT]
Switches the external input signals (HDV/DV, L-1).
N
i
k
m
O
j
l
P
U [BD/SD]
For operating BD/DVD or SD.
Q
R
V [PAGE PRV] [PAGE NEXT]
Returns to the previous page. Or advances to the next page.
W [ w ]
Move the playback position slightly backwards.
X [ v ]
Advance the playback position slightly.
A [DELETE]
Deletes a title or characters.
Y [#]
For entering characters.
B [ M ]
Opens/closes the disc tray.
Z [NAVIGATION]
Displays the playback navigation screen.
C [HDD]
For operating the HDD.
a [OK]
Confirms a selection or entry.
D [1]-[9]
For entering characters.
b [RETURN]
Returns to the previous screen without applying the selection
or entry.
E [Z]
For entering characters.
F [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [YELLOW]
Enabled when the color button is displayed.
c [ T ]
Move to the next chapter.
Memo:
d [ N ]
v
The sequence of the button color is different depending on
the model.
Fast forwards the video and starts slow playback.
G [DUBBING]
Displays the dubbing menu screen.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
e [ I ]
Plays the video.
Remote control codes
By setting a remote control code for the unit and remote
control, you can prevent two recorders from operating
simultaneously using the remote control for this unit.
(the setting for the unit and remote control at time of purchase
is “REMOTE CONTROL 3”.)
f [ W ]
Pauses the video that is currently playing.
g [ o ]
Stops playback/recording.
Memo:
v
h [MARK]
Changing the remote control code for the remote control
before the unit’s remote control code is changed will cause
the unit to be inoperable.
Change the unit’s remote control code first when changing
remote control codes.
Adds a chapter mark during playback or recording. Select
multiple titles from the playback navigation screen or other
screens.
i [PB MODE]
Display the playback settings screen.
m
Changing the remote control code for the
unit
j [ANGLE]
Switches the camera angle for playback.
1
2
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control
to display the “SETUP” menu
k [SET UP]
Displays the settings menu screen.
Change the “REMOTE CONTROL CODE” option
in the “SETUP” menu
l [SUB TITLE]
Switches the playback subtitle.
Memo:
v
m [INFORMATION CORRECT]
Displays the information editing screen.
m
Changing the remote control code for the
remote control
Press and hold the [OPTION] button on the
remote control
Change batteries for the remote control
1
v
If the operable distance of the remote control unit becomes
shorter, this means that the batteries are running out.
When this occurs, replace the batteries with new ones.
2
Press either of the [1], [2], [3] or [4] buttons
Press the number button that is equivalent to the remote
control code you desire.
v
3
Press the [OK] button
Press the [OK] button to change the remote control code.
v
4
Release the [OPTION] button on the remote
control
Memo:
v
If the remote control code is different from the unit, the
remote control code for the unit will be displayed on the
display window.
Batteries
:
Examples REMOTE CONTROL 3
v
Insert the batteries correctly according to the + and – signs.
Insert the – side of the battery first.
If an error occurs while using the remote control unit,
v
remove the batteries, wait for about five minutes, and
operate the remote control unit again after re-inserting the
batteries.
:
Battery life Approximately 6 months
(depending on the frequency of use)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Memo:
v
Connecting a Monitor
After connecting a component video cable, change the unit
setting to “COMPONENT OUTPUT”.
To display video images from this unit, connect it to a monitor.
v
This unit supports connections using “HDMI cable”,
“component video cable”, “S-video cable”, or “video cable”.
Memo:
v
Switch to the appropriate monitor input according to the
Connecting using an S-video cable
For connecting an S-video cable (sold separately).
type of connection cable used.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the monitor.
Connecting using an HDMI cable
Connecting using an HDMI cable (sold separately) enables
signals to be maintained in the digital format, and thus
playback of clear video images.
Connecting using a video cable
Connect the output terminal of this unit to the input terminal of
a TV using a video/audio cable (sold separately).
(Use a BNC adapter that is sold separately)
Memo:
v
To connect to a monitor that does not support the copyright
protection system (HDCP), set “HDCP”.
v
Use a High Speed HDMI Cable.
v
After connecting using an HDMI cable, change the unit
setting to “HDMI CONNECTION”.
Note:
v
Connect the S-video/video output of this unit directly to the
Connecting using a component video cable
TV (or monitor). Connecting this unit to the TV or monitor
via a video deck triggers the copy protection function, and
may cause distortion in the video images during playback.
Connecting using a component video cable (sold separately)
delivers playback images that are clearer than those by an S-
video cable.
v
Videos that are AACS copyright-protected are not output
from the S-video/video output terminals.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Connecting an Amplifier
Connecting a Video Deck
or Other Equipment
Connecting an audio amplifier
m
Connecting a video camera
Connecting using an optical digital cable
m
Connecting via the i.LINK terminal
HDD
REC
BD
REC
REC
MODE
INPUT
SELECT
MEDIA SELECT
BD/SD
ONE TOUCH
DUBBING
HDD
HDV/DV IN
Memo:
v
Remove the protection cap of the cable before connecting.
m
Connecting via the USB terminal
Store the protection cap properly to prevent it from being
misplaced.
m
Connecting using an audio cable
HDD
REC
BD
REC
REC
MODE
INPUT
SELECT
MEDIA SELECT
BD/SD
ONE TOUCH
DUBBING
HDD
HDV/DV IN
Memo:
v
Some video camera models may require an AC adapter
instead of batteries to run. For details, refer to the video
camera’s instruction manual.
Connecting a video deck or other
equipment (recording using this unit)
Memo:
v
When connecting using an S-video cable, change the
setting of “VIDEO INPUT SETTING” to “S-VIDEO”.
v
To record video images played back on this unit to an
external device (video deck, etc.), connect the output
terminal of this unit to the input terminal of the external
device.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
Connecting using a LAN cable (only for
SR-HD1700)
Connecting External
Devices
Connecting a wired remote control
External operation is enabled by connecting to a PC or similar
device using a LAN cable.
Using a wired connection enables stable control of this unit
from an external device.
Operation is possible using any code (1 to 4) regardless of
the remote control code settings of this unit.
Connecting the Power
Supply
Memo:
v
Connect the supplied power cable to this unit as follows.
There is currently no compatible remote control unit
available.
v
Connecting using an RS-232C cable (only
for SR-HD1700)
1
2
Connect the supplied power cable to the AC IN
terminal of this unit
Connect the other end of the power cable to a
power point
3
Press the [A] button on the remote control or
this unit to switch on the unit.
External operation is enabled by connecting an RS-232C
cable to a PC or similar device.
v
The power of this unit turns on, and a “HELLO” message
appears on the display window.
Note:
v
Do not use power cables other than that supplied with this
unit. Doing so may cause this unit to malfunction.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
4
Select “CLOCK SET”, and press the [OK] button
The Clock Set menu screen appears.
v
Setting and Displaying
Date/Time
Set the date/time of the built-in clock as follows. The
recording date/time is stored on the disc.
5'672
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
'ꢀ&+52.#;
/106*ꢃ&#;ꢃ;'#4
ꢁꢂ*
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'
Setting the date/time
Set the date/time of the built-in clock as follows.
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control unit
The Settings menu screen appears.
v
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
5'672
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢃ1((ꢄ
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55
37+%-ꢀ56#4672
1((
5
Set the time and date
Repeat the steps below to specify the time and date.
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢂ
v
① Press the [ J ] or [ K ] button, select the Clock Set
item, and press the [OK] button.
1((
$7<<'4ꢀ176276
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)
5'672
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
;'#4
/106*ꢁ&#;
6+/'
ꢂꢃꢄꢂ
,#0ꢁꢃꢄ
#/ꢄꢂꢅꢃꢃ
2
3
Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button
'06'4
Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the
[OK] button
“CLOCK SET/DISPLAY” menu screen appears.
v
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
5'6ꢀ72
4'6740
5'672
② Press the [ J ] or [ K ] button, change the setting
value, and press the [OK] button.
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢃ1((ꢄ
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55
37+%-ꢀ56#4672
1((
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢂ
1((
$7<<'4ꢀ176276
5'672
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
;'#4
/106*ꢁ&#;
6+/'
ꢂꢃꢄꢂ
ꢂꢃꢄꢂ
,#0ꢁꢃꢄ
#/ꢄꢂꢅꢃꢃ
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
'06'4
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
5'6ꢀ72
4'6740
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
3
Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the
[OK] button
The Clock Set/Display menu screen appears.
Setting and Displaying
Date/Time (Continued)
v
6
After setting is complete, select “ENTER”, and
press the [OK] button
5'672
v
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢃ1((ꢄ
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55
37+%-ꢀ56#4672
1((
Doing so exits date/time setting, and returns to the initial
screen.
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢂ
1((
$7<<'4ꢀ176276
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)
5'672
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
;'#4
/106*ꢁ&#;
6+/'
ꢂꢃꢄꢂ
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
,#0ꢁꢃꢄ
#/ꢄꢂꢅꢃꢃ
5'6ꢀ72
'06'4
4
Select “DATE DISPLAY”, and press the [OK]
button
The Date Display menu screen appears.
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
v
5'6ꢀ72
4'6740
Memo:
v
5'672
The value for seconds cannot be set. After setting the
minute, press the [SET UP] button according to the time
signal.
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
'ꢀ&+52.#;
/106*ꢃ&#;ꢃ;'#4
ꢁꢂ*
v
v
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'
To cancel date/time setting, press the [RETURN] button.
Doing so cancels date/time setting and returns to the initial
screen.
The year can be set from 2012 to 2037.
If “2037.12.31 23:59” is set, the time will change to
“2012.1.1 00:00” after one minute.
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
Changing the date display style
You can specify the display style of the date as follows.
5
Select the date display style.
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control
unit
5'672
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
2
Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button
The Settings menu screen appears.
;'#4ꢃ/106*ꢃ&#;
/106*ꢃ&#;ꢃ;'#4
&#;ꢃ/106*ꢃ;'#4
v
'ꢀ&+52.#;
/106*ꢃ&#;ꢃ
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'
ꢁꢂ*
5'672
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢃ1((ꢄ
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55
37+%-ꢀ56#4672
1((
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢂ
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
5'6ꢀ72
1((
4'6740
$7<<'4ꢀ176276
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)
v
Select a date display style from the following items.
:
:
:
YEAR.MONTH.DAY
Displays the date in the year/
month/day order.
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
MONTH.DAY.YEAR
DAY.MONTH.YEAR
Displays the date in the month/day/
year order.
Displays the date in the day/month/
year order.
6
After selecting, press the [OK] button
The date display style will be saved.
v
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation
4
Select “TIME DISPLAY CHOICE”, and press the
[OK] button
The Time Display menu screen appears.
Memo:
The date display style will be applied in the following
information displays.
v
v
Recording date of the title that is shown in the playback
navigation screen (The recording date will be shown in
place of the title if the title has not been input).
5'672
v
Date that is displayed in the title information display
screen
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
'ꢀ&+52.#;
/106*ꢃ&#;ꢃ;'#4
ꢁꢂ*
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'
Changing the time display style
You can specify the display style of the time as follows.
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control
unit
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
2
Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button
The Settings menu screen appears.
v
5
Select the time display style
5'672
5'672
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢃ1((ꢄ
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55
37+%-ꢀ56#4672
1((
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;
%.1%-ꢀ5'6
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢂ
'ꢀ&+52.#;
/106*ꢃ&#;ꢃ
ꢁꢂ*
ꢁꢂ*
ꢂꢅ*
1((
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'
$7<<'4ꢀ176276
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
5'6ꢀ72
4'6740
3
Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the
[OK] button
The Clock Set/Display menu screen appears.
Select from “12H” or “24H”.
:
12H Displays the time in AM/PM format.
v
:
24H Displays the time in 24-hour format.
6
After selecting, press the [OK] button
The time display style will be saved.
v
5'672
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢃ1((ꢄ
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55
37+%-ꢀ56#4672
1((
Memo:
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢂ
v
The time display style applies to the following.
v
v
v
Current time
1((
$7<<'4ꢀ176276
Date/time registered on the disc
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)
Recording date of the title that is shown in the playback
navigation screen
(The recording date will be shown in place of the title if
the title has not been input.)
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
5'6ꢀ72
v
Time of recording that is displayed in the title information
display screen
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
m
Importing data from a SDHC/SD to the HDD
Dubbing/Importing
Bi-directional dubbing between the HDD and a BD/DVD is
possible using this unit alone. Also, data can be imported to
the HDD from a video camera by connecting it via i.LINK or
USB.
Videos captured using a video camera can be imported to the
HDD by inserting the SDHC/SD card that the videos are
saved on.
m
Importing data from a video camera to the
HDD
Videos captured using a video camera can be imported to the
HDD.
This unit supports video camera connections via i.LINK and
USB.
Dubbing from the HDD to a BD/DVD
m
High-speed dubbing
Select this option if you want to significantly shorten the time
required for dubbing. Make use of a BD/DVD disc that
supports high-speed recording.
Memo:
v
For MOV format videos, only videos in the MOV format (SP
mode and HQ mode) taken using JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series are
compatible. There is no guarantee for importing videos
taken on devices by other company.
m
Dubbing in a specific recording mode
Select this option when you want to specify the recording
mode for dubbing. Dubbing can be performed in the recording
mode of your preference, such as whether to “maintain a high
picture quality” or “save as many titles as possible”.
v
For MXF format videos, only videos in the MXF format (SP
mode and HQ mode) taken using JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650 are compatible.
There is no guarantee for importing videos taken on
devices by other company.
Memo:
v
The image quality will not improve even when a recording
mode with image quality higher than that of the original
recording mode is chosen.
Dubbing using a specific recording mode will cause the disc
HDD
DR
Video Camera
USB/SDHC/SD
MOV*/MXF*
v
Deterioration-free
dubbing
DR
to be re-encoded.
(MOV*/MXF*)
Encode dubbing
SD-VIDEO(HD)*
DR
HDV/DV
HDV
Other options for importing data into the
HDD
AVCHD
AF/AN/AL/AE
m
Importing data from a BD/DVD to the HDD
You can import titles from a BD/DVD.
SD-VIDEO(SD)*
AVC
FR
DV
BD/DVD
HDD
DR
BD
L1 terminal
BDMV
VIDEO/
S-VIDEO
XP/SP/LP/EP
JPEG
BDAV
AF/AN/AL/AE
JPEG
DVD
.
EverioBackup *
AVC
FR
:
:
MOV*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode
and HQ mode using the JVC ProHD
MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM series
AVCHD
DVD-VR
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode
and HQ mode using JVC ProHD
MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM650
XP/SP/LP/EP
JPEG
DVD-Video *
Deterioration-free
dubbing
EverioBackup
(JPEG)
Encode dubbing
:
SD-VIDEO(HD)* SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 TS)
BD
:
SD-VIDEO(SD)* SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 PS)
BDAV
(BD-RE, JPEG)
m
Importing data from a video deck
You can import data to the HDD from an external video deck
by connecting it to a composite video or S input terminal.
:
:
DVD-video*
Discs that are not finalized cannot be
imported.
EverioBackup
disc*
Data disc containing high-definition videos
that are recorded in the MPEG2 format
using a DVD writer for Everio.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
m
Importing from a LAN-compatible device
Data on devices connected to the LAN terminal can be
imported to the HDD.
Memo:
v
Videos that are copy-controlled cannot be imported.
Motion JPEG is not supported
v
Dubbing chart
m
Dubbing the video data from the HDD
Format (BD)
Dubbing
Format (DVD)
Quality
BDMV
BDAV
BDAV
Content
Quality
DVD-VR
DVD-VIDEO
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
(HD Quality)
(HD Quality)
(SD Quality)
High-speed
dubbing /
Re-encoding
High-speed
dubbing /
Re-encoding
High-speed
dubbing /
High-speed
dubbing
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
Re-encoding
DR (MOV*/MXF*)
DR (Other)
AF/AN/AL/AE
AVC
-
High-speed
dubbing
Re-encoding
High-speed
dubbing /
High-speed
dubbing
Re-encoding
High-speed
dubbing /
Re-encoding
FR
-
-
-
-
High-speed
High-speed
dubbing /
Re-encoding
dubbing /
XP/SP/LP/EP*
Re-encoding
Memo:
v
High-speed dubbing to DVD-VIDEO format discs may not be performed for XP/SP/LP/EP mode titles that are not recorded
using the external inputs of this unit.
:
EP*
High-speed dubbing to DVD-VIDEO format discs in EP mode title
To perform high-speed dubbing of a EP mode title to a DVD-VIDEO format disc, set “HIGH-SPEED DUBBING” (A
dubbing a title that is recorded or imported with a setting other than “4:3”.
:
:
MOV*
MXF*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode and HQ mode using the JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD CAMERA
RECORDER GY-HM series
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM650
m
Dubbing the picture data from the HDD
Importing file
(HDD)
Media
BDAV (BD-RE) SDHC/SD
ü
ü
JPEG
Memo:
v
Video images may be distorted in the following situations during reencoding/dubbing when the monitor (TV) is connected to
this unit using an HDMI cable, or when the screen resolution is set to 1080p.
v
Proceeding with dubbing from the menu screen
v
Returning to the normal screen after dubbing has finished
v
This is not a malfunction. Change the screen resolution to a setting other than 1080p if you feel that this is annoying.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Formatting a disc
Formatting
1
Set the DVD or BD to be formatted on the disc
tray
Unused discs or SD cards may require formatting in some
cases.
2
When the need arises, format the disc or SD card
accordingly.
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the
remote control unit
The Media Management menu screen appears.
v
Memo:
v
Formatting a disc or SD card erases all existing data from
the media.
Double-check carefully before formatting so as not to erase
important titles.
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06
$&ꢁ&8&
(14/#6
(+0#.+<'
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
5&ꢀ%#4&
Format chart
(14/#6
Refer to the following chart for the disc types and format
when formatting a disc.
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ#ꢀ'4#5'
*&&
Note:
(14/#6
v
If a disc is formatted using an equipment not manufactured
by JVC, the disc may not be read correctly even though it
corresponds to the chart below.
In this case, reformat the disc using this unit, or make use
of another blank disc.
3
Select “FORMAT” from “BD/DVD”
A format selection screen appears.
v
Memo:
4
Select a format mode from the format selection
screen
v
BD-R and DVD-R discs can only be formatted once.
v
When a disc is re-formatted into another format, remove
the disc and load it again.
m
DVD format chart
Format
VR
Video
Format
Format
%10(+4/
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(14/#66'&
5'.'%6ꢀ#ꢀ(14/#6ꢀ/1&'
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
DVD-RW Single-sided, single
layer (4.7 GB)
84ꢀ/1&'
8+&'1ꢀ/1&'
DVD-R
Single-sided, single
layer (4.7 GB)
Single-sided, dual
layer (8.5 GB)
:
:
DVD
BD
Select a “Format mode” from “VR MODE” or “VIDEO
MODE”.
ü
:
Format supported.
m
BD format chart
Select a “Format mode” from “BDAV MODE” or
“BDMV MODE”.
BDAV
BDMV
Format
Format
Memo:
v
When “BDMV MODE” is selected, a “FOR DIRECT
RECORDING” or “FOR DUBBING” selection screen
appears after “Format mode” is selected.
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
BD-RE Single-sided, single
layer (25 GB)
v
v
Single-sided, dual
layer (50 GB)
To record directly to a BDMV format disc, select “FOR
DIRECT RECORDING”.
To use a BDMV format disc for purposes other than direct
recording, select “FOR DUBBING”.
BD-R
Single-sided, single
layer (25 GB)
Single-sided, dual
layer (50 GB)
ü
:
Format supported.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
5
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button in the
format confirmation screen
m
Cancel formatting
Press the [OPTION] button while formatting
1
126+105
$#%-
5612
%10(+4/
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(14/#66'&ꢀ+0ꢀ:::
#..ꢀ4'%14&'&ꢀ6+6.'5ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ'4#5'&
+6ꢀ6#-'5ꢀ#$176ꢀ;;;ꢀ/+076'5
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ(14/#6!
;'5
01
(14/#6
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ':+6ꢃ(41/ꢃ6*'ꢃ126+10ꢃ5%4''0
v
v
Formatting starts.
2
Select “STOP”, and press the [OK] button
A confirmation screen to stop formatting appears.
After formatting is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN
FORMATTED” message appears on the monitor, and the
normal screen is displayed.
v
3
Select “YES” on the confirmation screen and
press the [OK] button
%10(+4/
%10(+4/
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ*#5ꢀ$''0ꢀ(14/#66'&
(14/#66+0)ꢂ9+..ꢂ$'ꢂ56122'&
5612!
1-
;'5
01
(14/#6
ꢀꢀꢁ
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ':+6ꢂ(41/ꢂ6*'ꢂ126+10ꢂ5%4''0
Memo:
v
v
To return to the initial screen without formatting the disc,
Formatting is stopped.
select “DO NOT FORMAT” and press the [OK] button.
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to return
to the initial screen without formatting.
Note:
v
Formatting can be stopped if it seems to take a long time
(more than two minutes).
Note:
v
If for any reason formatting cannot be stopped, the
confirmation screen for stopping formatting will not appear
even if the [OPTION] button is pressed.
v
Do not turn off the power or unplug the power cable when
the “FORMATTING DISC…” message is displayed.
v
Note that formatting a disc with copyright-protected titles
erases all the titles from the disc.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
4
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button
Formatting (Continued)
Formatting an SD Card
1
Insert the SD card to be formatted into the [SD
SLOT]
With the terminal side facing down, insert the SD card until
a “click” sound is heard.
%10(+4/
6*'ꢀ%#4&̉5ꢀ%106'06ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ'4#5'&ꢀꢁ
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ56#46ꢀ(14/#66'&ꢀ!
v
;'5
01
v
v
Formatting starts.
After formatting is complete, a “THE SD CARD HAS BEEN
FORMATTED” message appears on the monitor, and the
normal screen is displayed.
Memo:
Note:
v
v
To return to the initial screen without formatting the disc,
Formatting cannot be performed if the SD card is write-
protected. In this case, turn off the write-protect lock before
inserting the SD card.
select “NO” and press the [OK] button.
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to return
to the initial screen without formatting.
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the
remote control unit
The Media Management menu screen appears.
Note:
v
Do not turn off the power or unplug the power cable when
the “FORMATTING SD CARD…” message is displayed. Do
not remove the SD card as well. Doing so may damage the
SD card.
v
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06
v
v
Note that formatting a disc with copyright-protected titles
erases all the titles from the disc.
$&ꢁ&8&
(14/#6
Once the formatting of the SD card begins, it cannot be
stopped.
(+0#.+<'
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
5&ꢀ%#4&
(14/#6
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ#ꢀ'4#5'
*&&
(14/#6
3
Select “FORMAT” from “SD CARD”
A confirmation screen to execute formatting appears.
v
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Recording Modes
Maximum recording time for each recording mode
You can specify a recording mode according to the intended use. Setting the video to a high picture quality shortens the
maximum recording time, while setting to a lower picture quality lengthens the recording time.
Refer to the following table for the maximum recording time in the respective modes. All figures shown in the table are
approximate values.
Recording
Mode
Quality
BD (Single-
sided, Single
Layer)
BD (Single-
sided, Dual
Layer)
DVD (Single-
sided, Single
Layer)
DVD (Single-
sided, Dual
Layer)
HDD (500 GB)
(*1)
DR
AF
AN
AL
AE
XP
SP
LP
EP
HD
1.9 hours
4 hours
3.8 hours
8 hours
-
-
40 hours (*2)
80 hours
-
-
6 hours
12 hours
18 hours
24 hours
10.5 hours
21 hours
42 hours
84 hours
-
-
126 hours
189 hours
252 hours
110 hours
222 hours
442 hours
887 hours
9 hours
-
-
12 hours
5.25 hours
10.5 hours
21 hours
42 hours
-
-
SD
1 hours
2 hours
4 hours
8 hours
1.7 hours
3.5 hours
7.1 hours
14.3 hours
:
:
*1
*2
If the HDD capacity is 320 GB (SR-HD1350), the recording time will be about 0.6 times the value stated.
An estimated figure when HDV is imported.
Memo:
v
DR mode
Abbreviation for Direct Recording. Videos are recorded in the original picture quality.
AF/AN/XP/SP mode
v
Recommended for recording images with fast motion, such as sports videos.
v
The AF/AN mode record images at the high-quality HD level.
v
The XP/SP modes record images at the high-quality SD level.
v
AL/AE/LP mode
Recommended for recording images with slow motion and little contrast, such as dramas.
v
AL/AE mode records images at the low-quality HD level.
v
LP mode records images at the low-quality SD level.
v
EP mode
Recommended for recording images with sharp outlines, such as animation videos, and when the recordable time (remaining
time) is limited.
v
You can change the recording mode by pressing the [OPTION] button on the remote control unit while playback, dubbing or
editing is not in progress.
① Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control unit
② Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK] button on the remote control unit
③ Select “RECORDING MODE” to which you want to change, and press the [OK] button on the remote control unit
There may be cases where it is not possible to record up to the maximum recording time as indicated in the table due to the
v
limitations of the BD standards.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Recording Modes
(Continued)
HD picture quality
v
Using BD enables dubbing to be done with HD picture
quality. To dub HD picture quality titles that are imported in
the HDD, it is recommended to use BD.
Note:
v
Dubbing to a DVD cannot be done in HD picture quality.
DR mode
v
HDV, MOV*/MXF* and SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2
TS) titles can be imported using the DR mode.
:
:
MOV*
MXF*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode and HQ
mode using the JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and HQ
mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
FR mode
FR mode is displayed as the recording mode in the following
cases.
v
FR mode during import into HDD
During import of SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 PS) titles
via high-speed dubbing. During import of data via high-
speed dubbing from DVD-VR discs recorded using other
units.
v
FR mode during dubbing from HDD
When selecting the most appropriate mode automatically
between XP and EP according to the remaining memory on
the disc.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
m
Procedure for one-touch importing
Importing Data to the HDD
Using the ONE TOUCH
DUBBING Button
1
Connect the device to be used. Alternatively,
insert an SD card.
Once preparations for importing have been done, the
v
message below will be shown on this unit’s display window.
:
:
:
i.LINK device
USB device
SD card
“HDV/DV RDY”
“USB RDY”
“SD RDY”
Titles can be imported to the HDD from an SD card or device
connected to a USB or i.LINK terminal simply by pressing the
[ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button on the unit.
v
File formats that can be imported
2
Press the [ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button on the
unit
One-touch importing starts.
① USB connection device, SD card
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 TS, PS),
MOV*/MXF*, and JPEG
v
:
MOV*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode
using the JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
:
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
② i.LINK-connected device
DV and HDV content
Memo:
v
Memo:
Data is searched according to the order of priority listed
below when multiple devices are connected to this unit.
USB h SD card h i.LINK
v
Refer to the following for the flow of operations by the
system of this unit.
Data is retrieved only from the first device and imported to
the HDD. Connect only the device that contains data you
want to import to the HDD.
The i.LINK connected device can only be used to import
from tape media.
3
System checks the device connection
v
The system of this unit detects the connected device.
Search for devices is performed in the sequence of USB,
SD card, followed by i.LINK.
v
4
System detects the titles to import
All titles that can be imported will be detected and imported.
All video files (scenes) imported using “ONE TOUCH
DUBBING” are combined into one title.
This unit does not support combining of titles during the
editing operation after import is complete. To combine and
import data, select “ONE TOUCH DUBBING”.
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.
Import of MOV files recorded using JVC GY-HM series SP
mode 1080i requires a duration that is about 1.3 times
longer than the usual time.
v
5
6
Importing of titles by this unit starts
After titles are successfully imported, a
“DUBBING IS COMPLETED” message appears
on the monitor
v
v
v
Continuous recording can be performed up to the maximum
recording time, however, the title is automatically divided
during recording.
%10(+4/
During recording of L-1 input signals to HDD, DVD-Video
format disc, or DVD-VR format disc: 8-hour interval
During recording of DV input signals to HDD, DVD-Video
format disc, or DVD-VR format disc: 8-hour interval
During recording in conditions other than those above: 24-
hour interval
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
1-
Note:
v
Do not unplug the cable while importing to the HDD is in
progress.
Memo:
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.
v
The following buttons are enabled when importing is in
progress.
[ A ]
v
For MOV format videos, only videos in the MOV format (SP
mode) taken using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD CAMERA
RECORDER GY-HM series are compatible. There is no
guarantee for importing videos taken on devices by other
company.
:
:
:
Continues importing while switching this
unit to the Standby mode.
[ONE TOUCH
DUBBING]
Press this button for three seconds or
longer to cancel importing.
v
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.
[OPTION]
Displays a pop-up menu for canceling
importing.
Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a
long time depending on the amount of files in the device or
media.
:
[ON SCREEN] Pressing this button each time displays or
hides the importing information.
Note:
v
Importing stops and a message appears on the monitor if
an error occurs during the importing process.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Full import
Importing Data from a
BD/DVD to the HDD
1
Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection
screen, and press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.
v
Data can be imported from a BD/DVD to the HDD as follows.
v
File formats that can be imported
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
:
Videos
BDMV, BDAV, AVCHD, DVD-VR, DVD-
VIDEO, EverioBackup
&7$$+0)
56'2
:
Still Images EverioBackup, BDAV (BD-RE)
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146
Memo:
v
&+5%
*&&
BDMV, AVCHD and EverioBackup titles that are imported
using “FULL IMPORT” are combined into one title.
This unit does not support combining of titles during the
editing operation after import is complete. To combine and
import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.
(7..ꢀ+/2146
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ
v
v
For data that is selected for import via “SEL.
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.
4'6740
v
Note:
“START” will appear instead of “NEXT” in the menu if the
disc is of a format other than “BDAV”. In this case, go to
step 5.
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.
v
Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a
long time depending on the amount of files in the device.
3
Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]
button
A pop-up menu appears.
m
Preparations
v
1
2
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray
4
Select the “RECORDING MODE” option.
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote
control unit
The importing screen appears.
&7$$+0)
56'2
v
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
&7$$+0)
56'2
&+5%
*&&
52
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
61ꢁ*&&
75$
61ꢁ&8&
&+5%
*&&
*&&
*&&
*&&
8+&'1
5&
&+5%ꢀ5&
2+%674'
&+5%
*&8ꢀ&8
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
&+5%ꢁ%12;
&+5%
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&+5%
&7$$+0)
4'6740
%#0%'.
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
3
Select “DISChHDD” in the importing screen, and
press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “DISChHDD” item.
v
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
The import selection screen appears.
v
Memo:
v
A recording mode selection appears instead of the import
selection screen when DVD-VIDEO is detected.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
5
3
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
Importing of the titles starts.
Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]
button
A pop-up menu appears.
v
v
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
&+5%
*&&
52
%10(+4/
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
1-
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
4
Select the “RECORDING MODE” option.
Specify a title
5
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
A screen for creating the import title list appears.
v
1
Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import
selection screen, and press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.
6
Create an import title list
Follow the steps below to create an import title list.
v
v
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
① Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press
the [OK] button
The Title List screen is displayed.
&7$$+0)
56'2
② Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button
Titles selected are added to the list.
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146
&+5%
*&&
Memo:
v
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside
the title.
(7..ꢀ+/2146
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the
same time.
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ
v
Select a title from the dubbing title list, and press the [OK]
button to perform the following changes.
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
v
&7$$+0)
Delete the selected title from the list
4'6740
v
Thumbnails may not be displayed during title selection
depending on the discs used.
v
v
If a “BDAV” disc is set, a recording mode selection screen
will appear.
If the disc is of a format other than “BDAV”, a screen for
creating an import title list will appear. In this case, go to
step 5.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
1
Select “RECORDING MODE”, press the [OK]
button, and select “RECORDING MODE” from
the recording mode selection screen
Importing Data from a
BD/DVD to the HDD
(Continued)
v
Select the “RECORDING MODE” option.
&7$$+0)
56'2
7
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
&7$$+0)
56'2
&+5%
*&&
52
2.'#5'ꢂ%4'#6'ꢂ#ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ+/2146
&+5%
*&&
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
#$%
5RQTVUꢀꢀ
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ
-+&5ꢂ914.&
0GYUꢂ###
4GRQTV
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ
&7$$+0)
4'6740
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)
$#%-
%#0%'.
56#46
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
2
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
Importing of the titles starts.
v
v
v
Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the
created title list.
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
%10(+4/
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
%10(+4/
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
1-
1-
Memo:
v
If the first play setting of the DVD-video has been set to top
Note:
menu or other settings, the title will not playback.
If playback does not start, press the play button or playback
the DVD-Video.
v
“START” cannot be selected for the following cases.
v
v
v
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected
HDD memory is insufficient
The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the
maximum amount
Canceling importing
v
A dubbing title list has not been created
m
To cancel importing before it starts
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]
button to cancel importing of a title.
accordingly.
v
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
Importing DVD-VIDEO
importing and return to the initial screen.
m
When DVD-VIDEO is detected, a recording mode selection
screen appears.
Follow the steps below to import DVD-VIDEO to the HDD.
To cancel importing while it is in progress
Press the [OPTION] button to display the pop-up menu.
Select “CANCEL” from the pop-up menu and press the
[OK] button. Doing so imports data to the HDD up to the
position where you have chosen to stop.
v
v
Importing will also be stopped when the [o] button is
pressed to stop playback.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
m
Preparations
Importing Data from a USB-
compatible Device to the
HDD
1
Connect the USB device (Everio, etc.) to this unit
using a USB cable
Data on devices connected to the USB terminal can be
imported to the HDD as follows.
HDD
REC
BD
REC
REC
MODE
INPUT
SELECT
MEDIA SELECT
BD/SD
ONE TOUCH
DUBBING
HDD
v
File formats that can be imported
HDV/DV IN
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 TS, PS), MOV*/
MXF*, and JPEG
:
MOV*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using the JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
:
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
Memo:
v
After connecting the USB cable, turn on the camera and
switch the mode of the camera.
Memo:
(Choose “Connect to a computer” or a similar option. For
v
Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined
into one title. This unit does not support combining of titles
during the editing operation after import is complete. To
combine and import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.
However, titles of MXF files will not be combined.
details refer to the camera’s instruction manual.)
“USB RDY” appears on the display window of the unit when
an USB device is recognized.
v
2
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote
control unit
The importing screen appears.
v
v
v
For data that is selected for import via “SEL.
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.
v
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)
Import of MOV files recorded using JVC GY-HM series SP
mode 1080i requires a duration that is about 1.3 times
longer than the usual time.
61ꢁ*&&
75$
61ꢁ&8&
&+5%
*&&
*&&
*&&
*&&
8+&'1
5&
&+5%ꢀ5&
2+%674'
Note:
&+5%
*&8ꢀ&8
&+5%ꢁ%12;
&+5%
v
Turn off the power for this unit and the connecting device if
an USB compatible device is to be connected to this unit.
Do not unplug the USB cable while importing a title.
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.
&+5%
v
%#0%'.
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.
For MOV format videos, only videos in the MOV format (SP
mode and HQ mode) taken using JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series are
compatible. There is no guarantee for importing videos
taken on devices by other company.
Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a
long time depending on the amount of files in the USB
device.
If a USB connection is used, this unit will only recognize one
device out of all the recording devices.
Depending on the video camera, the memory card slot will be
recognized but the internal device will not be recognized.
Use the following methods to solve this.
3
Select “USBhHDD” in the importing screen, and
press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “USBhHDD” item.
v
v
v
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
The import selection screen appears.
v
Full import
1
Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection
screen, and press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.
v
If the internal device is not recognized:
v
Copy the data from the camera’s internal memory or
HDD onto the SD card.
2
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
v
If using a JVC camcorder that has two memory card
slots:
&7$$+0)
56'2
Put the memory card that has the required data in slot A.
v
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146
If the target device is not recognized using the USB
connection, use the camcorder’s burner or a similar device
to dub the disc before proceeding with dubbing on this unit.
75$
*&&
(7..ꢀ+/2146
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ
v
When importing videos from a USB-connected camcorder,
data reading from the internal memory of the camcorder
may fail. If both the camcorder’s internal memory and SD
card are available, the SD card may be detected first. To
prevent this from occurring, remove the SD card before
reading data from the internal memory.
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
Importing of the titles starts.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
4
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
Importing Data from a USB-
compatible Device to the
HDD (Continued)
&7$$+0)
56'2
2.'#5'ꢄ%4'#6'ꢄ#ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ+/2146
75$
*&&
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢆꢇꢁꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢈꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢁꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢈꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢁꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢈꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢁꢁ
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
#&&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ&7$$+0)
$#%-
%#0%'.
56#46
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
%10(+4/
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
v
v
Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the
created title list.
1-
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
Specify a title
%10(+4/
1
Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import
selection screen, and press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
v
1-
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146
Note:
75$
*&&
v
“START” cannot be selected for the following cases.
v
v
v
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected
HDD memory is insufficient
(7..ꢀ+/2146
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ
The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the
maximum amount
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
v
A dubbing title list has not been created
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
accordingly.
v
A screen for creating the import title list appears.
3
Create an import title list
Follow the steps below to create an import title list.
Canceling importing
v
m
To cancel importing before it starts
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]
① Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press
the [OK] button
The Title List screen is displayed.
v
button to cancel importing of a title.
② Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button
Titles selected are added to the list.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
importing and return to the initial screen.
Memo:
m
v
To cancel importing while it is in progress
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside the
v
title.
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the
same time.
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you
have chosen to stop.
v
v
Select a title from the dubbing title list, and press the [OK]
button to perform the following changes.
v
Delete the selected title from the list
Thumbnails will not be displayed when a title is selected.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
2
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote
Importing Data from an SD
Card to the HDD
control unit
v
The importing screen appears.
&7$$+0)
56'2
Data can be imported from a SD (SDHC) card to the HDD as follows.
v
File formats that can be imported
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)
61ꢁ*&&
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 TS, PS), MOV*/
MXF*, and JPEG
61ꢁ&8&
&+5%
75$
*&&
*&&
*&&
*&&
8+&'1
:
MOV*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using the JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
5&
&+5%ꢀ5&
2+%674'
&+5%
*&8ꢀ&8
&+5%ꢁ%12;
&+5%
&+5%
:
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
%#0%'.
0':6
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
&7$$+0)
Memo:
126+10
4'6740
v
The SD SLOT does not support SDXC cards.
v
To use an SDXC card, connect a SDXC-compatible USB
card reader (sold separately) via USB connection.
This unit may not recognize the SD card if a USB card
reader with three or more card slots is used.
3
Select “SDhHDD” in the importing screen, and
press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “SDhHDD” item.
v
v
v
v
4
Use a card reader with no more than two card slots.
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
The import selection screen appears.
v
Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined
into one title. This unit does not support combining of titles
during the editing operation after import is complete. To
combine and import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.
However, titles of MXF files will not be combined.
For data that is selected for import via “SEL.
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.
Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.
Import of MOV files recorded using JVC GY-HM series SP
mode 1080i requires a duration that is about 1.3 times
longer than the usual time.
Full import
1
v
v
v
Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection
screen, and press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.
v
2
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146
Note:
v
Do not remove the SD card when importing of the titles is in
5&
*&&
progress or when the importing screen is displayed.
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.
v
v
v
For MOV format videos, only videos in the MOV format (SP
mode and HQ mode) taken using JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series are
compatible. There is no guarantee for importing videos
taken on devices by other company.
For MXF format videos, only videos in the MXF format (SP
mode and HQ mode) taken using JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650 are compatible.
There is no guarantee for importing videos taken on
devices by other company.
(7..ꢀ+/2146
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
v
Importing of the titles starts.
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.
m
Preparations
1
Insert the SD (SDHC) card into the [SD SLOT]
%10(+4/
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
1-
Memo:
v
“SD RDY” appears on the display window of the unit when
an SD card is recognized.
Memo:
v
Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button
to return to the previous screen.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
4
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
Importing Data from an SD
Card to the HDD
&7$$+0)
56'2
2.'#5'ꢄ%4'#6'ꢄ#ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ+/2146
(Continued)
5&
*&&
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢆꢇꢁꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢈꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢁꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢈꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢁꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢈꢁ
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢁꢁ
Specify a title
1
Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import
selection screen, and press the [OK] button
#&&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ&7$$+0)
$#%-
v
A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.
%#0%'.
56#46
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
&7$$+0)
56'2
v
v
Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the
created title list.
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
5&
*&&
(7..ꢀ+/2146
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
%10(+4/
5'.'%6
126+10
':+6
1-
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
&7$$+0)
4'6740
1-
v
A screen for creating the import title list appears.
3
Create an import title list
Follow the steps below to create an import title list.
v
① Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press
the [OK] button
The Title List screen is displayed.
Memo:
v
Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button
to return to the previous screen.
Note:
② Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button
Titles selected are added to the list.
Memo:
v
v
“START” cannot be selected for the following cases.
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside
v
the title.
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected
v
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the
same time.
HDD memory is insufficient
v
The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the
maximum amount
v
Select a title from the dubbing title list, and press the [OK]
button to perform the following changes.
v
A dubbing title list has not been created
v
Delete the selected title from the list
accordingly.
v
When there are files of different formats (AVCHD, SD-
VIDEO, MOV*/MXF*) in the SD card, press the [RED]
button to select the format you want to display.
v
Thumbnails will not be displayed when a title is selected.
:
MOV*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using the JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
Canceling importing
m
To cancel importing before it starts
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]
:
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
v
button to cancel importing of a title.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
importing and return to the initial screen.
m
To cancel importing while it is in progress
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the
v
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you
have chosen to stop.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Memo:
v
Importing Data from an
i.LINK-compatible Device to
the HDD
After the device (camera, etc.) has been connected using
an i.Link cable, turn on the power of the device and switch
it to playback mode. (refer to the device’s (camera, etc.)
instruction manual for more details.)
v
“HDV/DV RDY” appears on the display window of the unit
when an i.LINK device is recognized.
Data on devices connected to the i.LINK terminal can be
imported to the HDD as follows.
2
v
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote
control unit
The importing screen appears.
Video formats that can be imported:
DV and HDV content
v
Memo:
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.
Devices that have in-built copyright protection such as
&7$$+0)
56'2
v
D-VHS and digital tuners cannot be connected. This unit
only allows import from tape media.
Importing will not be performed if no tape has been inserted
into the HDV/DV camera.
Importing will be cancelled when the mode is changed from
HDV to DV or vice versa.
For camcorders that support both HDV and DV recording,
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)
61ꢁ*&&
75$
61ꢁ&8&
&+5%
v
*&&
*&&
*&&
*&&
8+&'1
v
5&
&+5%ꢀ5&
2+%674'
&+5%
*&8ꢀ&8
&+5%ꢁ%12;
&+5%
v
&+5%
use only one of the modes for recording and playback.
There is no support for editing using a connected PC.
Only one i.LINK device can be connected to this unit at a
v
%#0%'.
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
v
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
time.
Note:
3
v
Select “HDV/DVhHDD” in the importing screen,
and press the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “HDV/DVhHDD” item.
Turn off the power for this unit and the connecting device
when connecting using an i.LINK compatible device.
Do not unplug the i.LINK cable while importing to the HDD
v
v
is in progress.
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
The import selection screen appears.
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.
For example, during full import of HDV content from JVC
v
v
GY-HD100 via i.LINK connection, the beginning of the
image may not be captured if GY-HD100 is not set as
follows.
(1) Set the [IEEE1394] switch at the rear of the GY-HD100
unit to [HDV] or [DV] according to the recorded content.
(2) Set [MENU]/[VIDEO FORMAT]/[PB TAPE] on the
GY-HD100 unit to [HDV] or [DV].
Imports data from the beginning
You can import videos from the beginning till the end as
follows. If the current position is halfway through the tape,
import after rewinding the tape to the beginning.
(As with (1), set according to the recorded content. Setting
to [AUTO] is not allowed.)
(3) Check to ensure that the [HDV] or [DV] lamp on the side
of the GY-HD100 unit is lit.
(Check to ensure that the lamp that is lit corresponds to the
setting in (1) and (2).)
When importing from a tape that contains data captured in
the HDV recording and DV recording modes, change the
video camera setting according to each recording mode,
check to ensure that the corresponding lamp in (3) is lit,
and choose to start import from the current position.
1
Select “IMPORT FROM BEGINNING”, and press
the [OK] button
A check mark is added to the “IMPORT FROM
BEGINNING” item.
v
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢁ6*'ꢁ/'6*1&ꢁ1(ꢁ+/2146
*&8ꢀ&8
*&&
m
Preparations
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ$')+00+0)
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ%744'06ꢁ215+6+10
1
Connect the device (camera, etc.) to this unit
using an i.LINK cable
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
HDD
REC
BD
REC
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
':+6
REC
MODE
INPUT
SELECT
MEDIA SELECT
BD/SD
ONE TOUCH
DUBBING
HDD
&7$$+0)
HDV/DV IN
v
A recording mode selection screen appears.
3
Select “RECORDING MODE”, press the [OK]
button, and select from the pop-up menu
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
3
Select “RECORDING MODE” and press the [OK]
button to display the pop-up menu
Select “XP”, “SP”, “LP”, or “EP” from the “RECORDING
MODE” option.
Importing Data from an
i.LINK-compatible Device to
the HDD (Continued)
v
&7$$+0)
56'2
v
Select “XP”, “SP”, “LP”, or “EP” from the “RECORDING
5'6ꢁ6*'ꢁ4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'
MODE” option.
*&8ꢀ&8
*&&
52
&7$$+0)
56'2
4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'
5'6ꢁ6*'ꢁ4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'
*&8ꢀ&8
*&&
52
&7$$+0)ꢁ(14ꢁ*&8ꢁ6#2'ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ&4ꢁ/1&'ꢃꢁ&8ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ52'%+(+'&ꢁ4'%ꢁ/1&'
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'
5'.'%6
126+10
':+6
1-
&7$$+0)
4'6740
&7$$+0)ꢁ(14ꢁ*&8ꢁ6#2'ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ&4ꢁ/1&'ꢃꢁ&8ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ52'%+(+'&ꢁ4'%ꢁ/1&'
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
Memo:
5'.'%6
126+10
':+6
1-
v
HDV contents will be imported in DR mode.
&7$$+0)
4'6740
Memo:
4
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
Importing of the titles starts.
v
HDV contents will be imported in DR mode.
v
v
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
4
v
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
Importing of the titles starts.
After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.
v
%10(+4/
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
1-
%10(+4/
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
1-
Canceling importing
m
To cancel importing before it starts
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]
Imports data from current position
v
You can import videos from the current tape position till the
end as follows.
button to cancel importing of a title.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
importing and return to the initial screen.
1
Select “IMPORT FROM CURRENT POSITION”,
and press the [OK] button
v
m
A check mark is added to the “IMPORT FROM CURRENT
POSITION” item.
To cancel importing while it is in progress
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the
v
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you
have chosen to stop.
2
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢁ6*'ꢁ/'6*1&ꢁ1(ꢁ+/2146
*&8ꢀ&8
*&&
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ$')+00+0)
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ%744'06ꢁ215+6+10
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
':+6
&7$$+0)
v
A recording mode selection screen appears.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
v
To import to the HDD, the capacity of the HDD must be
twice the size of the transfer files.
Importing Data from a LAN-
compatible Device to the
HDD (only for SR-HD1700)
The available disk space in the HDD is stated in the
Readme.txt (*1) file.
Download the file to check when transferring the files.
:
(*1) The file is located in the current directory of the HDD
Data on devices connected to the LAN terminal can be
imported to the HDD as follows.
in this unit.
v
Setting items for FTP communication
v
File formats that can be imported
MOV (MPEG2-TS), MXF (MPEG2-TS)
:
:
:
:
user (user name)
pass (password)
mode
Optional
v
Optional
Image resolutions that can be imported
(for NTSC)
1920x1080/59.94i, 1920x1080/29.97p, 1920x1080/23.98p,
1440x1080/59.94i,
Either passive or active
21
port (port number)
1280x720/59.94p, 1280x720/29.97p, 1280x720/23.98p
(for PAL)
1920x1080/50i, 1920x1080/25p, 1440x1080/50i,
1280x720/50p, 1280x720/25p
Memo:
v
Still image files cannot be imported.
v
MOV (H.264) and MXF (H.264) files cannot be imported.
v
SR-HD1350 does not support import from a LAN-
compatible device.
m
Preparations
1
Connect the LAN device (PC, etc.) to this unit
using a LAN cable
Memo:
v
Execute the network setting.
v
v
Make use of FTP for file transfer.
Use the PC as the FTP client, and this unit as the FTP
server.
2
Perform FTP transfer
Importing of the files starts.
v
Memo:
v
Do not unplug the LAN cable while importing to the HDD is
in progress.
v
v
You can execute FTP transfer with multiple files selected.
In the event that an error occurs during FTP transfer, import
of the file for which transfer is in progress and those that
are not transferred will be canceled.
v
Make use of an FTP client software for FTP transfer.
Examples of FTP client software
:
Windows FTP client function of Internet Explorer, etc.
:
Mac OS
Cyberduck, etc.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
3
On this screen, select “DISCiVIDEO”
Dubbing a Title from the
HDD to a BD/DVD
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)
Titles stored in the internal HDD can be dubbed to a BD/DVD
as follows.
61ꢁ*&&
75$
61ꢁ&8&
&+5%
*&&
*&&
*&&
*&&
8+&'1
Memo:
5&
&+5%ꢀ5&
2+%674'
v
Disc types that can be used for dubbing with this unit are:
&+5%
*&8ꢀ&8
BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RW, and DVD-R.
&+5%ꢁ%12;
&+5%
&+5%
%#0%'.
0':6
v
HD content for which the delete scene operation has been
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
applied cannot be dubbed to BDMV. Perform seamless
conversion before starting a dubbing operation.
126+10
4'6740
v
v
Contents imported from HDV (DR mode) and HD Everio
A check mark is added to the “DISCiVIDEO” item.
cannot be dubbed to a BDMV disc. Perform mode
conversion before starting a dubbing operation.
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
Memo:
v
Dubbing can also be performed from the Playback
Navigation screen.
Note:
v
① Select the titles to dub, and press the [OPTION]
The following high bit-rate files may not meet the Blu-ray
Disc standards when they are dubbed to a BD.
button
② Select “DUB”, and press the [OK] button
③ Follow Steps 3 to 4 of “Preparation”
v
When a BDAV/BDMV disc is created (high-speed
dubbing) by importing content recorded in the JVC
GY-HM series (SP mode or HQ mode).
m
Dubbing titles
Select “RECORDING FORMAT”, and press the
[OK] button
v
When a BDAV disc is created (high-speed dubbing) by
1
importing content captured in the JVC GZ-HD7/6 etc
FHD mode.
v
When a BDAV/BDMV disc is created by importing
content that is captured using another video camera at a
peak bit-rate that exceeds 28.8 Mbps.
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5
v
If the Blu-ray Disc standards are not met, playback on
&+5%
*&&
another player may fail. To ensure that the standards are
satisfied, perform high-speed dubbing after converting the
recording mode, or perform dubbing by specifying a
recording mode.
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
&8&ꢁ8+&'1
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
Dubbing from the HDD to a BD/DVD
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
m
Preparation
v
Choose a format.
1
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray
Memo:
v
A message appears on the monitor in the following cases
2
Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]
button
where a disc cannot be written to. Take the necessary
actions according to the message.
v
When an incompatible disc type is set
&7$$+0)
56'2
v
When there is insufficient space on the set disc
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5
v
When a finalized disc is set
&+5%
*&&
2
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote
control unit
The Dubbing menu screen appears.
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
&8&ꢁ8+&'1
v
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
Select “HIGH-SPEED DUBBING” or a recording mode of
your preference.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Memo:
Memo:
v
v
High-speed dubbing
Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside
the title.
Select this option if you want to significantly shorten the
time required for dubbing.
Make use of a disc that supports high-speed recording.
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the
same time.
v
v
Select a title from the dubbing title list, and press the [OK]
button to perform the following changes.
AF/AN/AL/AE
Can be selected for BD-R and BD-RE. Dubbing is done
with HD picture quality.
v
Delete the selected title from the list
v
v
v
Change the list arrangement
XP/SP/LP/EP
v
Change the name of the selected title
Dubbing is done with SD picture quality.
FR
Select “RENAME TITLE”, and press the [OK] button to
change the title of the dubbing source. Dubbing of the new
title is performed.
An appropriate mode will be chosen automatically between
XP to EP according to the remaining memory on the disc.
v
The recording mode and recording time of the selected
video title is displayed at the top right corner of the screen.
5
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
3
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
&7$$+0)
56'2
&7$$+0)
56'2
%4'#6'ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5
&+5%
*&&
#$%
&+5%
*&&
5RQTVUꢀꢀ
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ
-+&5ꢂ914.&
0GYUꢂ###
4GRQTV
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'
&8&ꢁ8+&'1
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)
$#%-
%#0%'.
0':6
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
1-
5'.'%6
126+10
':+6
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
Note:
A screen for creating a dubbing title list appears.
v
“NEXT” cannot be selected for the following cases.
4
Create a dubbing title list
v
A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected
v
Disc memory is insufficient
&7$$+0)
56'2
v
A dubbing title list has not been created
%4'#6'ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)
&+5%
*&&
accordingly.
#$%
5RQTVUꢀꢀ
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ
-+&5ꢂ914.&
0GYUꢂ###
4GRQTV
Memo:
v
Steps 6 and 7 are not applicable for “BDAV” and “DVD-VR”
disc formats. Go to step 8.
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ
6
Select a background image for the disc menu
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)
$#%-
%#0%'.
0':6
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5
&+5%
*&&
v
Follow the steps below to create a dubbing title list.
%*#0)'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ/'07ꢀ$#%-)4170&
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ$#%-)4170&
① Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press
the [OK] button
② Select the titles to dub, and press the [OK] button
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5
(+0#.+<'
(+456ꢀ2.#;
4'2'#6
10
010'
1((
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
Select a background image for the disc menu from
“Background” or “Still Picture”.
v
“SELECT FROM DEFAULT BACKGROUND”
A default background set is used for the disc menu.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
v
“TITLE 1”
Dubbing a Title from the
HDD to a BD/DVD
(Continued)
The first title on a finalized disc will be played back
automatically when it is inserted into another device.
Memo:
v
“NONE” cannot be selected for “FIRST PLAY” for BDMV.
② Select “REPEAT”, and choose either “OFF” or “ON”
v
“SELECT FROM STILL PICTURES”
v
“OFF”
Use a still image on the HDD for the disc menu.
The largest size allowed for a still image that is used as
the background is 5120 x 3840.
The disc will stop and the menu will be displayed after all
the titles are played back.
v
“ON”
Memo:
v
Repeat playback from the first title will start automatically
after all the titles are played back.
The background image of the disc menu can be selected
(only for DVD-Video and BDMV).
v
The following sizes are recommended for still images.
③ Select “RENAME DISC”, and press the [OK] button
v
:
BD
1920 x 1080
A screen for entering the disc name appears.
Finalization is performed using the entered disc name.
:
DVD 720 x 480 (for NTSC)
720 x 576 (for PAL)
8
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
v
When a still image is used, the two vertical or horizontal
edges are trimmed based on the side that is smaller than
the aspect ratio of the video to be dubbed.
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5
&+5%
*&&
%*#0)'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ/'07ꢀ$#%-)4170&
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ$#%-)4170&
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5
(+0#.+<'
(+456ꢀ2.#;
4'2'#6
10
010'
1((
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
Example of Side-cut Still Image
7
Set the operations for finalize
v
v
Dubbing starts. A progress bar is displayed during the
dubbing process.
&7$$+0)
56'2
After dubbing is complete, a “DUBBING IS COMPLETED”
message appears on the monitor.
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5
&+5%
*&&
Memo:
%*#0)'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ/'07ꢀ$#%-)4170&
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ&'(#7.6ꢀ$#%-)4170&
v
Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button
to return to the previous screen.
5'.'%6ꢀ(41/ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5
(+0#.+<'
(+456ꢀ2.#;
4'2'#6
10
m
Cancel dubbing
010'
1((
To cancel dubbing before it starts
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
v
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
button to cancel dubbing.
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
dubbing and return to the initial screen.
v
Finalize will be performed after dubbing if “ON” has been
set for “FINALIZE”.
To discontinue dubbing while it is in progress
If a BDMV disc is being dubbed, “OFF” cannot be set for
“FINALIZE”. And once the BDMV disc is dubbed the disc
cannot be rewritten.
v
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the
Cancel Dubbing menu, and press the [OK] button. Data will
be written onto the disc up to the point where import is
cancelled.
v
If a DVD-Video or BDMV disc is being dubbed, the settings
for “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT” and “RENAME DISC” can be
changed.
Memo:
v
When dubbing to a BD-R or DVD-R, the disc memory will
① Select “FIRST PLAY”, and select either “NONE”,
be reduced as data will still be written onto the disc up to
the point where dubbing is discontinued.
“TOP MENU” or “TITLE 1”
v
“NONE”
A finalized disc will not be automatically played back
when it is inserted into another device.
v
“TOP MENU”
The disc menu will be displayed automatically when a
finalized disc is inserted into another device.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
4
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
Memo:
A message appears on the monitor when dubbing cannot
be performed in the following cases. When this occurs,
replace the disc or SD card with one that is usable.
Dubbing Still Images from
the HDD
v
Still images stored in the internal HDD can be dubbed to a
BD-RE or an SD card as follows.
v
When an incompatible disc or SD card is set
v
When there is insufficient space on the set disc or SD
card
Memo:
v
Only “JPEG” still image format is supported.
v
When an unformatted disc or SD card is set
m
Before dubbing
Dubbing to a disc
v
5
Select the still images to dub, and press the
[MARK] button
Set the BD-RE for dubbing on the disc tray
v
Dubbing to an SD card
Insert the SD card to be dubbed into the [SD SLOT]
&7$$+0)
56'2
m
Dubbing still images
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote
control unit
%4'#6'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ.+56ꢀ(14ꢀ&7$$+0)
)4172
2CIG
#..
1
v
The Dubbing menu screen appears.
2
On this screen, select “DISC/SDiPICTURE”
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
)4172
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
61ꢁ*&&
75$
61ꢁ&8&
&+5%
*&&
*&&
*&&
*&&
8+&'1
v
Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the
selected image.
5&
&+5%ꢀ5&
2+%674'
&+5%
*&8ꢀ&8
&+5%ꢁ%12;
&+5%
All still images with a check mark are dubbed.
&+5%
Memo:
v
To clear the check mark, select the corresponding still
%#0%'.
0':6
image, and press the [MARK] button.
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
v
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
Pressing the [OPTION] button displays a pop-up menu.
The pop-up menu enables you to perform the following
operations.
3
Select the media to dub to from the media
selection screen
A checkmark will be added to the selected media.
:
:
:
BACK
Exits the pop-menu and returns to the
initial screen.
v
SELECT ALL
DESELECT ALL
Selects all still images within the same
group.
&7$$+0)
56'2
Clears the selection of all still images
within the same group.
+05'46ꢁ#0&ꢁ5'.'%6ꢁ#ꢁ/'&+#
Note:
v
A message appears if the selected still images do not fit
into the disc. Check mark cannot be added to a still image if
there is insufficient space on the disc.
*&&
$&ꢀ4'
*&&
5&ꢁ%#4&
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
m
Dubbing from the Playback Navigation
screen
Dubbing Still Images from
the HDD (Continued)
Dubbing can also be performed from the Playback Navigation
screen.
6
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
1
Select the still images to dub, and press the
[OPTION] button
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)
&7$$+0)ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5
0#8+)#6+10 6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
$#%-
2.#;
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5ꢀ61ꢀ$'ꢀ&7$$'&ꢂꢀꢃꢃꢃ
/1&'ꢀ%*#0)'
'&+6
'&+6ꢀ+0(1
16*'45
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1 2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
v
v
Dubbing starts. A progress bar is displayed during the
dubbing process.
2
3
Select “DUB”, and press the [OK] button
After dubbing is complete, a “DUBBING IS COMPLETED”
message appears on the monitor.
Follow steps 3 to 5 of “Dubbing still images”
Memo:
Memo:
v
v
A directory of the following configuration is created in the
media, and still images are written with file names ranging
from “PIC_0001.jpg” to “PIC_9999.jpg”.
Check marks of still images that appear on the Playback
navigation screen will remain added to the image on the
still image selection screen.
root
DCIM
100JVCS
PIC_0001.JPG
PIC_0002.JPG
PIC_0003.JPG
m
Cancel dubbing
To cancel dubbing before it starts
v
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]
button to cancel dubbing.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
101JVCS
PIC_0001.JPG
PIC_0002.JPG
PIC_0003.JPG
dubbing and return to the initial screen.
To discontinue dubbing while it is in progress
v
Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the
Cancel Dubbing menu, and press the [OK] button. Data will
be written onto the disc up to the point where import is
cancelled.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Memo:
v
Enabling Playback on
To cancel the finalizing operation, select “NO” and press
the [OK] button.
Other Devices (Finalizing)
5
Setting the top menu items
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs may need to be finalized before
they can be played on other DVD players.
BD-R discs need to be finalized before they can be played on
other BD players.
(+0#.+<'
6*'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ9+..ꢁ$'ꢁ(+0#.+<'&ꢁ61ꢁ'0#$.'ꢁ2.#;$#%-ꢁ10ꢁ16*'4ꢁ&8&ꢁ&'8+%'5
&8&ꢀ49ꢁ8KFGQ
Memo:
v
%*#0)'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ/'07ꢁ$#%-)4170&
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ&'(#7.6ꢁ$#%-)4170&
Discs in the Video mode becomes a DVD-Video format with
a title menu after finalizing.
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ56+..ꢁ2+%674'5
v
Discs containing DVD-Video data can be finalized by
setting the disc operation settings according when the disc
is inserted into this unit.
(+456ꢁ2.#;
4'2'#6
612ꢁ/'07
1((
v
Recording or editing of the disc will not be possible after it
(+0#.+<'
&1ꢁ016ꢁ(+0#.+<'
is finalized.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
/'&+#ꢁ/#0#)'
4'6740
v
If a DVD that was recorded using VR mode has been
finalized, the disc can only be played back on VR mode
compatible devices.
v
Before finalizing, set “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT”, and
“CHANGE DISC MENU BACKGROUND” accordingly.
Set according to the steps below.
① Select “FIRST PLAY”, and select an appropriate first
Finalizing
play setting item
1
2
Set the BD or DVD to be finalized on the disc tray
v
This item is used for setting the disc operation when a
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the
remote control unit
finalized disc is inserted into another device.
:
:
:
NONE
A finalized disc will not be automatically
played back when it is inserted into another
device.
v
The Media Management menu screen appears.
TOP MENU
TITLE 1
The disc menu will be displayed
automatically when a finalized disc is
inserted into another device.
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06
$&ꢁ&8&
(14/#6
The first title on a finalized disc will be
played back automatically when it is
inserted into another device.
(+0#.+<'
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
5&ꢀ%#4&
(14/#6
② Select “REPEAT”, and select an appropriate repeat
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ#ꢀ'4#5'
*&&
setting item
v
Set the disc action to be taken after all titles have been
(14/#6
played back.
:
:
OFF
The disc will stop and the menu will be displayed
after all the titles are played back.
3
Select “FINALIZE” from “BD/DVD”
ON
Repeat playback from the first title will start
automatically after all the titles are played back.
4
Select “YES” and press the [OK] button
The top menu setting screen appears.
v
%10(+4/
&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(+0#.+<'&ꢀ(14ꢀ2.#;$#%-ꢀ10ꢀ16*'4ꢀ&8&ꢀ&'8+%'5
+6ꢀ9+..ꢀ6#-'ꢀ#$176ꢀ::ꢀ/+076'5
;17ꢀ%#0016ꢀ5612ꢀ6*'ꢀ(+0#.+<#6+10ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ56#465
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ(+0#.+<'!
;'5
01
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
Unfinalizing a disc
Only DVD-RW discs that are finalized on this unit can be
Enabling Playback on
Other Devices (Finalizing)
(Continued)
unfinalized.
After a disc is unfinalized, addition of new titles and editing
are possible.
③ Select “CHANGE DISC MENU BACKGROUND” to
Note:
select a background image for the top menu
v
All discs except DVD-RW (VR mode) cannot be unfinalized.
v
You can register and use a background image of your
m
preference.
To unfinalize a disc
1
Set a DVD-RW disc that is finalized by this unit
on the disc tray
(+0#.+<'
5'.'%6ꢀ#ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ#5ꢀ$#%-)4170&ꢀ&'5+)0ꢀ(14ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'07ꢀ5%4''0
2CIG
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the
remote control unit
The Media Management menu screen appears.
)4172
#..
v
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06
$&ꢁ&8&
(14/#6
(+0#.+<'
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
5&ꢀ%#4&
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06
4'6740
(14/#6
Memo:
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ#ꢀ'4#5'
*&&
v
The items in “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT” and “CHANGE
(14/#6
6
Select “FINALIZE”, and press the [OK] button
3
4
Select “FINALIZE” from “BD/DVD”
(+0#.+<'
Select “YES” and press the [OK] button
6*'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ9+..ꢁ$'ꢁ(+0#.+<'&ꢁ61ꢁ'0#$.'ꢁ2.#;$#%-ꢁ10ꢁ16*'4ꢁ&8&ꢁ&'8+%'5
&8&ꢀ49ꢁ8KFGQ
%*#0)'ꢁ&+5%ꢁ/'07ꢁ$#%-)4170&
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ&'(#7.6ꢁ$#%-)4170&
5'.'%6ꢁ(41/ꢁ56+..ꢁ2+%674'5
%10(+4/
(+456ꢁ2.#;
4'2'#6
612ꢁ/'07
1((
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ70(+0#.+<'
+6ꢀ6#-'5ꢀ#$176ꢀ:::ꢀ/+076'5
;17ꢀ%#0016ꢀ5612ꢀ6*'ꢀ241%'55ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ56#46'&
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ70(+0#.+<'!
;'5
01
FINALIZE
&1ꢁ016ꢁ(+0#.+<'
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
':+6
/'&+#ꢁ/#0#)'
v
v
Finalizing starts.
After finalization is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN
FINALIZED” message appears on the monitor.
v
v
Unfinalizing starts.
After unfinalizing is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN
UNFINALIZED” message appears on the monitor.
%10(+4/
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ*#5ꢀ$''0ꢀ(+0#.+<'&
1-
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
3
Set the number of discs to copy using the [
buttons
You can specify up to a maximum of 10 discs.
J
/
K
]
Copying the Entire Disc
v
Copying the entire disc allows all contents on a BD (BDAV,
BDMV) or DVD (AVCHD, DVD-Video, DVD-VR) to be copied
onto another disc.
&7$$+0)
52'%+(;ꢀ6*'ꢀ07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ%12+'5ꢀ#0&ꢀ5'.'%6ꢀ̌':'%76'̍
Note:
v
Contents on a DVD-VR that is not finalized cannot be
copied to other discs.
v
Content cannot be copied to a formatted BD-R or DVD-R
07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ%12+'5
2
disc. Make use of an unformatted disc.
v
To copy to a BD disc, use BD-R or BD-RE discs. To copy
to a DVD, use DVD-R/-RW discs.
v
The disc to be copied onto will be formatted when copy is
%#0%'.
$#%-
0':6
5'.'%6
126+10
performed. Check that the disc has not been used before
or if it is ok to delete data on the disc when using a BD-RE
or a DVD-RW.
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
4
v
Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
The disc tray will open automatically.
In the case of BD, volume labels are not copied.
v
v
If an unsupported disc is set, “UNABLE TO IMPORT FROM
DISC” or “UNABLE TO DUB ONTO DISC INSERT
ANOTHER DISC” will be displayed on the monitor. Use a
disc that is supported by this unit.
5
6
Set the source BD or DVD on the disc tray
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
v
For details on discs that are supported by this unit, refer to
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)
&+5%ꢀ%12;
1
Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote
control unit
The Dubbing screen appears.
v
+05'46ꢀ6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ61ꢀ$'ꢀ%12+'&
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
61ꢁ*&&
75$
61ꢁ&8&
&+5%
&7$$+0)
4'6740
8+&'1
*&&
*&&
*&&
*&&
5&
&+5%ꢀ5&
2+%674'
v
v
The disc tray will close automatically. The source BD or
DVD will be recognized, and copying to the internal HDD
will proceed.
&+5%
*&8ꢀ&8
&+5%ꢁ%12;
&+5%
&+5%
The disc tray will open automatically after copying has
finished and “READY TO COPY NOW. INSERT THE DISC
FOR COPYING” will be displayed on the monitor.
%#0%'.
0':6
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
126+10
4'6740
Memo:
v
Confirm the insufficient space on the internal HDD when
2
Select “DISChDISC”, and press the [OK] button
A menu screen for copying the entire disc appears.
the copy interrupts.
v
7
Set a BD or DVD to copy on the disc tray
Memo:
v
During copy of the entire disc, data is temporarily copied to
the internal HDD.
v
Only discs that are not copyright-protected can be copied.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dubbing/Importing
v
v
After copy is complete, the data copied onto the HDD will
be deleted.
Copying the Entire Disc
(Continued)
Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK]
button to cancel disc copying.
8
Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
&7$$+0)
56'2
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)
&+5%ꢀ%12;
&+5%ꢀ%12;
%10(+4/
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ%#0%'.ꢀ&7$$+0)!
;'5
01
4'#&;ꢀ61ꢀ%12;ꢀ019ꢂꢀ+05'46ꢀ6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ(14ꢀ%12;+0)
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
&7$$+0)
4'6740
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
v
The disc tray will close automatically. BD or DVD will be
recognized, and the contents that were copied to the HDD
will be copied to the disc.
Memo:
v
The copy operation will not be performed when the
remaining disc memory is not sufficient.
9
Complete the entire disc copying
v
After copy is complete the tray will open automatically, and
copy of the entire disc ends.
%10(+4/
%12;+0)ꢀ1061ꢀ6*'ꢀ:::ꢀ&+5%ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
1-
Memo:
v
The screen prompting you to insert a new disc appears
repeatedly until this unit has finished copying the number of
discs specified in Step 3. When the message appears, set
a new BD or DVD on the disc tray, select “START”, and
press the [OK] button.
&7$$+0)
56'2
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)
&+5%ꢀ%12;
%12;+0)ꢀ1061ꢀ6*'ꢀꢂ56ꢀ&+5%ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&
+05'46ꢀ#ꢀ0'9ꢀ&+5%
%#0%'.
$#%-
56#46
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
':+6
&7$$+0)
4'6740
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Direct recording to discs
Recording Using External
The video from the external device can be recorded to the
optical disc directly.
Inputs
Videos on an external device that is connected to i.LINK
(HDV/DV) or video/S-video input can be recorded to the HDD.
BD, DVD can be recorded from the [VIDEO]/[S-VIDEO] or
SDI input.
1
Press the [BD/SD] button on either this unit or
the remote control to specify the “BD” as a
recording medium
2
Press the [ M ] button on either this unit or the
remote control to set a DISC on the disc tray
Memo:
v
Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.
3
Format a DISC
1
2
Press the [HDD] or [BD/SD] button to select the
location to record the file
v
Press the [INPUT SELECT] button on the remote
control, and select an external input (HDV/DV or
L-1)
4
5
Press the [INPUT SELECT] button either on this
unit or the remote control to start the video to be
recorded
3
Press the [REC MODE] button and select a
recording mode
Press the [ R ] and [ I ] buttons either on this
unit or on the remote control together to start
recording
4
Press the [ R ] and [ I ] remote control buttons
together to start the recording process
Recording can also be start by pressing the [ R ] button on
this unit.
Memo:
v
v
Supported discs are BD-R/RE and DVD-R/RW.
v
v
Format the BD-R/RE disc to the BDAV or BDMV format.
5
Operate the external device to output the videos
to be recorded to the i.LINK (HDV/DV) or the
video/S-video input.
Menu cannot be created when recording directly to a
BDMV format disc.
v
Format the DVD-R/RW disc to the VR or Video format.
6
Press the [ o ] button on either this unit or the
remote control to display the pop-up screen,
choose “STOP” and press the [OK] button
Pausing recording
You can pause the process while recording videos to the
HDD or a BD/DVD.
v
End the recording.
Memo:
v
When recording images via a video camera using i.LINK
1
2
Select the location to record videos to
connection, recording may stopped if the video camera is
loaded with a DV tape while in the shooting mode. In this
case, remove the DV tape before recording.
Press the [ W ] button on this unit or the remote
control
v
Recording will be stopped if the maximum recording time
has been reached, or if there is insufficient memory in the
media.
Memo:
v
Titles for which recording is in progress will not be divided
when recording is paused.
v
It takes a little moment to start recording after the button is
pressed.
For the recording modes and maximum recording time for
Resuming Recording
1
While recording is paused, press the [ W ] button
on this unit or the remote control
Memo:
v
You can also resume recording by pressing the [ R ] button
on the unit.
v
v
You can also resume recording by pressing the [ I ] button
while holding down the [ R ] button on the remote control.
A chapter is automatically created when recording
resumes.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
Recording Using External
Inputs (Continued)
m
RECORDABLE MEDIA
RECORDING MODE
RECORDABLE MEDIA
HDD
DVD-R/RW
BD-R/RE
BD-R/RE
(VR Format/Video
Format)
(BDAV format)
(BDMV Format)
DR
HDV
HDV
-
HDV
HDV
HDV
HDV
HDV
L-1
-
AF (HD)
AN (HD)
AL (HD)
AE (HD)
XP (SD)
SP (SD)
LP (SD)
EP (SD)
-
HDV
HDV
-
HDV
HDV
-
HDV
HDV
-
HDV
DV/L-1
DV/L-1
DV/L-1
DV/L-1
DV/L-1
DV/L-1
DV/L-1
DV/L-1
-
-
-
-
L-1
L-1
L-1
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
Using Playback Navigation
About Playing Back
Videos can be easily played back for viewing using the
“Playback Navigation” function available on this unit.
Videos or edited videos stored on the internal HDD, as well
as videos stored on a disc or SD card can be played back on
this unit.
The types of media that are playable on this unit are as
follows.
Displaying the Playback Navigation screen
v
Videos and still images stored on the internal HDD
v
1
Videos stored on different disc types
Videos and still images stored on backup discs created
using the “Everio Writer”
Select the location of the playback file
Press the [HDD] button on the remote control unit
v
v
Play back videos or still images stored on the HDD.
v
Videos and still images stored on SD cards
v
Press the [BD/SD] button on the remote control unit.
These videos can be easily played back for viewing using the
“Playback Navigation” software that comes with this unit.
For details on the “Playback Navigation” software, refer to
Play back videos or still images stored on a BD/DVD or a
SD.
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
Memo:
v
This unit does not support DivX videos.
v
v
If AVCHD files are displayed in thumbnails, black bars may
appear on the left and right borders depending on the video
resolution.
Memo:
v
Pressing the [BD/SD] button each time switches the media
v
To display MOV*/MXF* files stored on an SD card using
to play back between BD/DVD and SD.
Playback Navigation, make use of list display. Thumbnail
display is not supported. Files on the SD card cannot be
played back directly. To do so, import them into a HDD.
v
v
You can also switch the media to play back by pressing the
[HDD] or [BD/SD] button when the Playback Navigation
screen is displayed.
v
For details on importing MOV*/MXF* files from an SD card,
The recording mode and recording time of the selected
video title is displayed at the top right corner of the screen.
:
:
MOV*
MXF*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode and HQ
mode using the JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
Operating Playback Navigation
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and HQ
mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
m
Playing a video/still image
Plays the selected video/still image.
Display Marks on the Playback Navigation
Screen
6+6.'ꢃꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢃ4'%14&+0)ꢃ6+/'ꢃꢃ:2
2CIG
ꢄ
ꢀꢁꢂꢃOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
Icon
Mark name
Explanation
)4172
001
002
003
004
008
Protect Mark Indicates protected titles.
VKVNG
005
006
007
Mode
Indicates titles for which
mode conversion has been
Conversion
Preset Mark preset.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
Not Viewed
Mark
Indicates titles that have not
24'8ꢃ2)
0':6ꢃ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
been viewed or groups
containing titles that have
not been viewed.
v
Select a title to play back, followed by pressing the [OK] or
[I] button to play the selected video/still image.
Scene
Indicates titles for which
Delete Mark scene delete or chapter
delete has been applied.
Memo:
v
Select a group and press the [OK] button to display all titles
in the group.
Group Mark
Indicates a group.
Playlist Mark Indicates a playlist.
Not Playable Indicates titles that cannot
Mark
be played.
Question
Mark
Indicates titles of which the
thumbnails cannot be
displayed. Playback may not
be possible.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
m
Switching between video and still image
displays
Using Playback Navigation
(Continued)
Switching between thumbnail and list
displays
You can switch the display between the video thumbnail list
screen and still image thumbnail screen.
m
v
When the video thumbnail list screen is displayed
You can switch between the thumbnail display and list display
of a video.
6+6.'ꢃꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢃ4'%14&+0)ꢃ6+/'ꢃꢃ:2
2CIG
ꢄ
ꢀꢁꢂꢃOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
v
When the video thumbnail list screen is displayed
)4172
001
002
003
004
008
6+6.'ꢃꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢃ4'%14&+0)ꢃ6+/'ꢃꢃ:2
2CIG
ꢄ
ꢀꢁꢂꢃOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
VKVNG
)4172
005
006
007
001
002
003
004
008
VKVNG
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
24'8ꢃ2)
0':6ꢃ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
005
006
007
Press the [GREEN] button to display the still image
thumbnail list screen.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
24'8ꢃ2)
0':6ꢃ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
v
When the still image thumbnail list screen is displayed
Press the [RED] button to display the title list screen.
When the title list screen is displayed
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
v
(1.&'4
0#8+)#6+10 6+6.' ꢄ.+56ꢅ
8+&'1
2+%674'
2CIG
)4172
#..
#$%
5RQTVUꢀꢀ
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ
-+&5ꢂ914.&
0GYUꢂ###
4GRQTV
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
%106'06
(1.&'4
4'6740
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ
#PKOCN
5'.'%6
Press the [RED] button to display the video thumbnail list
screen.
1-
4'6740
)4172
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
6*7/$0#+. 2+%674'
0#8+)#6+10
126+10
m
Displaying the Option menu
Press the [RED] button to display the video thumbnail list
screen.
Displaying the Option menu enables you to perform different
operations on a selected title/group, including “BACK”,
“PLAY”, “DELETE”, “DUB”, “GROUP”, “UNGROUP”, “DO
NOT GROUP”, “MODE CHANGE”, “EDIT”, “EDIT INFO” and
“OTHERS”.
m
Displaying a group/folder
A group/folder screen can be displayed.
6+6.'ꢃꢅ.+56ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
1
Select a title/group, and press the [OPTION]
button
An Option menu appears.
)4172
6+/'ꢃꢃ:2
ꢄ
ꢀꢁꢂꢃOKP
8+&'1
#..
2CIG
9GFFKPI
&TKXKPI
$KTVJFC[ꢃ%QOOKVVGG
v
6TCXGN
2KEPKE
5RQTVUꢃFC[
2KCPQꢃEQPEGTV
001
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
$#%-
2.#;
005
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
001
002
003
004
008
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
24'8ꢃ2)
0':6ꢃ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
VKVNG
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
0#8+)#6+10
005
006
007
Press the [YELLOW] button to display the group/folder
screen.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
v
EDIT INFO
2
Select an operation option, and press the [OK]
button
Options that cannot be operated are displayed in gray and
cannot be selected.
Switches to the menu screen of the sub-items.
v
v
MODIFY TITLE NAME/MODIFY GROUP NAME
Switches to the rename screen for the selected title/
group name.
v
MODIFY THUMBNAIL
Switches to the thumbnail modification screen of the
selected title.
Option menu list
v
BACK
Returns to the previous screen.
v
CHANGE SHOOTING DATE/TIME
Switches to the recording date modification screen of the
selected title.
v
PLAY
Plays back the selected title/group.
For details on the button operations during playback, refer
v
v
DELETE
PROTECT
Deletes a selected title/group.
Switches to the protection screen of the selected title/
group.
v
DUB
Performs dubbing of a selected title/group.
v
UNPROTECT
Switches to the screen for turning off protection of the
selected title/group.
v
GROUP
Groups the selected titles/groups.
v
UNGROUP
Ungroups a selected group.
v
OTHERS
Switches to the menu screen of the other-items.
v
CHAPTER LIST
DETAILS
THUMBNAIL
LIST
VIDEO
PICTURE
GROUP
FOLDER SELECT
v
v
DO NOT GROUP
v
Removes the selected titles from a group.
v
v
v
MODE CHANGE
Changes the mode of the selected title/group.
v
v
v
v
CHAPTER LIST
Displays the chapters of a selected title.
EDIT
v
CONTENT
v
Switches to the menu screen of the sub-items.
v
CHAPTER EDIT
Switches to the chapter edit screen of the selected title.
v
PLAYLIST EDIT
Switches to the playlist edit screen of the selected title.
v
DELETE SCENE
Switches to the delete scene screen of the selected title.
v
DIVIDE
Switches to the dividing screen of the selected title.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
Frequently used button operations
Video Playback Operation
m
[ I ] button
v
If the stop position (resume point) is memorized in the
selected video, pressing the button plays back the video
from this position.
The video may not resume playback depending on the
media and settings used. For details, refer to “RESUME”
v
If playback is paused (Still mode), pressing the button
resumes playback.
m
[ o ] button
v
Pressing the button stops playback after memorizing the
stop position (resume point).
v
Pressing the button again after playback stops clears the
memory of the stop position (resume point).
m
[ W ] button
Pressing the button stops playback temporarily.
v
m
[ N ] button
v
Pressing the button once during playback switches to a
playback speed of 1.3 times (with audio sound).
Pressing the button in the 1.3x playback or fast forward
v
mode fast forwards the video.
Pressing the button each time switches the search speed.
(5xh10xh30xh60x)
Memo:
v
The listed speed for searching and slow motion is an
approximate amount.
v
Pressing the button in the Still mode forwards the video
frame by frame.
v
Pressing and holding down the button in the Still mode
starts playback in slow motion.
Pressing the button during playback in slow motion
switches the playback speed. The speed changes each
time the button is pressed.
(1/24xh1/16xh1/8xh1/2x)
m
[ O ] button
v
During normal playback, 1.3x playback, fast forward, or fast
reverse, pressing the button fast reverses playback.
Pressing the button each time switches the search speed.
(1xh5xh10xh30x)
v
Pressing the button in the Still mode reverses the video
frame by frame.
v
Pressing and holding down the button in the Still mode
starts reverse playback of the video in slow motion.
Pressing the button during playback in slow motion
switches the playback speed. The speed changes each
time the button is pressed.
(1/24xh1/16xh1/8xh1/2x)
Memo:
v
The listed speed for searching and slow motion is an
approximate amount.
m
[ T ] / [ S ] button
Pressing any of the buttons moves the chapter position.
v
m
[MARK] button
Pressing the button enables you to add a chapter mark to a
v
title.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
m
[ v ] button
Useful button operations
v
During normal playback, 1.3x playback, slow motion
playback, fast forward, or fast reverse, pressing the button
moves the playback position forward by about 30 seconds.
Pressing the button multiple times moves playback to the
position equivalent to the number of times pressed
multiplied by 30 seconds.
m
[PB MODE] button
Displays the Playback Settings screen, which enables you
to modify the settings.
v
For details, refer to “Changing Playback Settings”.
m
[AUDIO] button
Switches the audio channel.
v
Normal playback will resume after the position has been
moved. If pressed during 1.3x playback, 1.3x playback will
continue after the position has been moved.
Contents may be played back in the normal mode
depending on the type of disc or content.
v
m
[SUB TITLE] button
Switches the subtitle display.
v
m
v
[ANGLE] button
Switches the angle.
Pressing the button in the Still mode moves the current
paused position forward by about 30 seconds while
maintaining the Still mode.
v
Memo:
v
Pressing the [AUDIO], [SUB TITLE], or [ANGLE] button has
no effect if their selection is not available in the playback
video.
m
[ w ] button
v
During normal playback, 1.3x playback, slow motion
playback, fast forward, or fast reverse, pressing the button
moves the playback position back by about seven seconds.
Pressing the button multiple times moves playback to the
position equivalent to the number of times pressed
multiplied by seven seconds.
v
Normal playback will resume after the position has been
moved. If pressed during 1.3x playback, 1.3x playback will
continue after the position has been moved.
Contents may be played back in the normal mode
depending on the type of disc or content.
v
Pressing the button in the Still mode moves the current
paused position back by about seven seconds while
maintaining the Still mode.
m
[HDD] button
v
During playback of videos on a “BD/DVD” or “SD”, pressing
the button stops the current playback and switches to the
“HDD” mode.
Pressing the button during display of the Playback
Navigation screen switches to the Playback Navigation
screen for the “HDD” mode.
m
[BD/SD] button
v
During playback of videos on a “BD/DVD” or “SD”, pressing
the button stops the current playback and switches from
“BD/DVD” to “SD” or vice versa.
Pressing the button during display of the Playback
Navigation screen switches to the Playback Navigation
screen for the other media. During playback of videos on
the “HDD”, pressing the button stops the current playback
and switches to “BD/DVD” mode.
Memo:
v
The display switches automatically to the SD mode only if
the inserted SD card contains playable videos or still
images.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
Playing an EverioBackup Disc*
Playing Videos on a
BD/DVD
:
EverioBackup
disc*
Data disc containing high-definition videos
that are recorded in the MPEG2 format
using a DVD writer for Everio.
Playback starts automatically after a BD/DVD is set.
If the Auto Play feature is disabled, play the title using
Playback Navigation.
1
Set the disc on the disc tray
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
Memo:
v
v
For details on the button operations during playback, refer
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button
Playback of the selected title starts.
v
Memo:
Playing a disc when Auto Play is enabled
v
If the current playback location is “HDD” or “SD”, press the
[BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to
“BD/DVD”.
1
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray
Auto Play starts.
v
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up
Playback Navigation.
Pressing the [I] button plays back titles starting from that
with the oldest recording date.
Playing a disc when Auto Play is disabled
1
Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
v
Playing Video Discs Created Using a PC
Videos that are created using a PC can be played back using
Playback Navigation.
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
2+%674'
1
Set the disc on the disc tray
001
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
v
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button
Playback of the selected title starts.
v
Memo:
v
The formats that can be played back are BDAV, BDMV,
DVD-Video and DVD-VR (CPRM-compatible).
5'.'%6
126+10
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
'06'4
$#%-
8+&'1 2+%674'
)4172
v
v
If the current playback location is “HDD” or “SD”, press the
[BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to
“BD/DVD”.
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button
Playback of the selected title starts.
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up
Playback Navigation.
Pressing the [I] button starts playback from the stop
Memo:
v
If the current playback location is “HDD” or “SD”, press the
position (resume point) of the disc.
[BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to
“BD/DVD”.
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized or if the
setting for “RESUME” has been set to “OFF”, playback
starts from the beginning of the disc.
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up
Playback Navigation.
Pressing the [I] button starts playback from the stop
v
Playback may not be possible due to compatibility
problems.
position (resume point) of the disc.
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized or if the
setting for “RESUME” has been set to “OFF”, playback
starts from the beginning of the disc.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
Playing Videos on the HDD
Playing Videos on a SD
Titles stored on the HDD can be played back using Playback
Card
Navigation.
Titles stored on an SD card can be played back using
Playback Navigation.
You can select a video to play from “Title”.
You can select a video to play from “Title”, “Group”, or
“Playlist”.
Memo:
v
1
Insert the SD card into the [SD SLOT]
For details on the button operations during playback, refer
v
Switch the playback location to “SD CARD” after the SD
card is detected by the unit.
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
Playing titles stored on the HDD
v
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
v
2+%674'
2
Select the titles to playback, and press the [I]
button
Playback of the selected title starts.
001
v
Memo:
v
If the current playback location is “BD/DVD” or “SD CARD”,
press the [HDD] button on the remote control unit to switch
it to “HDD”.
v
v
To play back specific titles within a group, select the group,
press the [OK] button, and select the titles accordingly.
5'.'%6
126+10
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
'06'4
$#%-
8+&'1 2+%674'
)4172
Videos can also be played back without starting up
Playback Navigation.
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button
Playback of the selected title starts.
Pressing the [I] button starts playback of the most recently
played title.
v
If there are no recently played titles, playback starts from
the title with the most recent recording date.
Memo:
v
Playback navigation displays AVCHD files stored on the SD
card in titles, not in scenes (chapters). Titles are grouped
such as according to the date, recording mode, or number
of scenes. Make use of thumbnail display to display titles.
List display is not supported.
v
The formats that can be played back are AVCHD and SD-
VIDEO. If AVCHD files are displayed in thumbnails, black
bars may appear on the left and right borders depending on
the video resolution.
v
When there are files of different formats (AVCHD, SD-
VIDEO, MOV*/MXF*) in the SD card, press the [RED]
button to select the format you want to display.
:
MOV*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using the JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM series
:
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode and
HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD
CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
v
Videos can also be played back without starting up
Playback Navigation.
Pressing the [I] button starts playback from the stop
position (resume point).
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized,
playback starts from the beginning of the playable content.
If the setting for “QUICK STARTUP” is set to “OFF”, the
resume point will not be memorized when the power is
turned OFF.
For details on the button operations during playback, refer to
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
Enabled button operations during still
image playback
Playing Still Images (JPEG)
Still images stored on the HDD/BD/DVD/SD card can be
played back using Playback Navigation.
m
[ I ] button
v
Pressing the button when a title/group is selected starts
playback of the still images in the title/group in a slideshow.
Playing still images
m
[ o ] button
Pressing the button stops the slideshow and displays the
Playback Navigation screen.
1
Select the playback location
v
:
:
:
HDD
If the current playback location is “BD/DVD” or
“SD CARD”, press the [HDD] button on the
remote control unit to switch it to “HDD”.
m
[ W ] button
Pressing the button stops the slideshow temporarily.
BD/DVD
SD
If the current playback location is “HDD” or “SD
CARD”, press the [BD/SD] button on the remote
control unit to switch it to “BD/DVD”.
v
m
[ S ] / [ T ] button
Pressing the button displays the previous or next still
image.
v
If the current playback location is “HDD” or “BD/
DVD”, press the [BD/SD] button on the remote
control unit to switch it to “SD CARD”.
m
[ A ] button
Pressing the button ends playback of the still images and
turns the power of the unit to “Off”.
2
Set the media
v
v
To play a media other than “HDD”, set the media on which
the still images are stored.
Memo:
:
BD/DVD Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray
v
The display of still images can be zoomed in/out or rotated
:
SD
Insert the SD card into the [SD SLOT]
using the following buttons when the slideshow is paused.
v
3
[ v ]/[BLUE] button
Select the still images to play, and press the [ I ]
button
Rotates the still image by 90° in the anti-clockwise
direction.
v
Images selected are played back in a slideshow.
v
[ w ]/[YELLOW] button
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
Rotates the still image by 90° in the clockwise direction.
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
v
[OK]/[RED] button
(1.&'4
Enlarges the still image.
v
[RETURN]/[GREEN] button
Reduces the enlarged still image.
v
[ J / K / H / I ] button
Moves the display position of the enlarged still image
toward the direction indicated by the button.
v
This unit does not have a still image edit feature. Still
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
%106'06
(1.&'4
images cannot be saved when they are zoomed in or
rotated.
4'6740
v
Priority of display is given to the media (“BD/DVD” or “SD
Memo:
CARD”) that contains playable still images.
If both “BD/DVD” and “SD CARD” contain playable videos,
priority of display will be given to the most recently used
media.
v
The slide show plays back images according to the date of
the files.
v
v
If folders exist, files inside the selected folder will be played.
You can specify the “REPEAT”, “SLIDESHOW INTERVAL”
and “SLIDESHOW EFFECTS” settings in the Playback
Settings menu.
“Playback Settings”.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
Playback settings
Changing Playback
Settings
2.#;$#%-ꢀ5'66+0)
4'2'#6
1((
%*#0)'ꢀ6+6.'
Displaying the playback settings menu
%*#0)'ꢀ%*#26'4
6+/'ꢀ,7/2
1
Press the [PB MODE] button on the remote
control unit during the playback of a title
The Settings Menu screen appears.
v
v
The playback settings menu can only be displayed during
the playback of a title.
v
Only settings that are supported by the current title being
played back can be changed in the playback settings
menu.
m
REPEAT
The following items can be set.
Items are not displayed if they cannot be set.
Items displayed in gray cannot be set.
Setting Values
OFF
Description
Turns off repeat.
Playback Settings Menu
Audio/subtitle settings
#7&+1ꢁ57$6+6.'
Repeats playback of the currently played
title.
TITLE
Repeats playback of the currently played
chapter.
CHAPTER
TRACK
Repeats playback of the currently played
track.
#7&+1ꢂ.#0)7#)'
ꢀ
.ꢁ4
ꢃ
%*#0)'ꢂ#7&+1ꢂ176276
57$6+6.'ꢂ.#0)7#)'
Repeats playback within the currently
played folder.
FOLDER
Repeats playback of the entire disc.
ALL
A-B
Repeats playback of the section between the
specified starting and ending points.
Pressing the [OK] button specifies the
displayed scene as the starting point (Point
A). Pressing the [OK] button after forwarding
playback specifies the displayed scene as the
ending point (Point B).
Memo:
v
“AUDIO/SUBTITLE” will be displayed only if they are
available in the video content. The setting value differs
depending on the content. Items that are not available in
the content cannot be set.
m
CHANGE TITLE
You can change to a different title by entering the corresponding
numeric value. Any value that is larger than the number of titles
cannot be entered.
m
m
m
AUDIO LANGUAGE
m
CHANGE CHAPTER
CHANGE AUDIO OUTPUT
You can change to a different chapter by entering the
corresponding numeric value. Any value that is larger than the
number of chapters cannot be entered.
SIGNAL TYPE (BD-ROM)
PRIMARY VIDEO
v
v
v
v
v
v
m
PRIMARY AUDIO
TIME JUMP
SECONDARY VIDEO
You can move to a specific playback position by entering a time.
This is not possible if the specified time is not valid.
CHANGE SECONDARY VIDEO
SECONDARY AUDIO
m
SLIDESHOW INTERVAL
SECONDARY AUDIO LANGUAGE
The following items can be set.
3SEC/5SEC/10SEC/20SEC/30SEC modes
m
m
m
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE STYLE
CHANGE ANGLE
m
SLIDESHOW EFFECTS
The following items can be set.
Setting Values
Description
OFF
ON
Turns off slideshow effect.
Turns on slideshow effect. “Fade out” and
“Fade in” effects can be applied when
switching from one slide to another.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Back
m
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION
Playback Settings Menu
(Continued)
The following items can be set.
Setting
Values
Description
OFF
ON
Turns off DNR (Digital Noise Reduction).
Video settings
Reduces noise that is prominent in images
of lengthy videos.
8+&'1ꢀ5'66+0)
2+%674'ꢀ37#.+6;
014/#.
1((
m
PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT
The following items can be set.
&+)+6#.ꢀ01+5'ꢀ4'&7%6+10
241)4'55+8'ꢀ176276
#761ꢁ
Setting
Values
Description
AUTO1
Displays video images after they are
converted according to the film material.
AUTO2
In addition to the “AUTO1” option, support is
also provided for progressive videos recorded
at 30 frames per second.
m
PICTURE QUALITY
The following items can be set.
Setting Values
Description
VIDEO
Most suitable for video images (TV broadcast,
etc.). Select this option when playing videos
with significant movements or animated
videos.
NORMAL
CINEMA
FINE
Standard picture quality.
Effective when playing movies.
Produces sharp images with enhanced
outlines.
SOFT
Reduces noise that is prominent in the
video image.
USER
SETTING
Enables the Details setting. For details,
refer to “DETAIL SETTING”.
m
DETAIL SETTING
The following items can be set.
Choose an option and press [OK] to set the respective values.
Setting Values
Description
CONTRAST
A value between “-7” and “+7” can be set.
BRIGHTNESS A value between “0” and “15” can be set.
SHARPNESS
COLOR
A value between “-6” and “+6” can be set.
A value between “-7” and “+7” can be set.
A value between “0” and “5” can be set.
GAMMA
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Editing
Before editing
This unit mainly edits video images stored on the HDD. To edit video images stored in a disc or SD card, do so after importing
them to the HDD.
Data on a finalized disc cannot be edited. To edit a finalized disc, you have to either unfinalize the disc, or do so after importing
the data to the HDD.
Memo:
v
Only discs that are finalized using this unit can be unfinalized.
Editable items for different media
Items that are editable vary according to the type of media on which the video data is stored. For details, refer to the media chart
below.
m
Media chart
Editing option
HDD
BD-R/BD- BD-R/BD- DVD-RW/
SD
HDD/BD-
RE/SD
RE
RE
DVD-R
(BDAV)
(BDMV)
picture
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Grouping
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Changing the Title/Group Name
Deleting a Title/Group
Turning On Title/Group Protection
Turning Off Title/Group Protection
Creating a Playlist
-
ü
ü
*3
-
*1
*1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ü
ü
Editing a Thumbnail
-
Editing a Chapter
*2
-
-
*1, *2
Dividing
-
-
-
Delete Scene
-
-
ü
ü
Changing the Disc Name
Changing the Shooting Date/Time
-
-
ü
-
-
-
Memo:
:
:
:
*1
*2
*3
Supports only the “VR MODE”.
Supports only dividing and combining of chapters.
For BDMV disc (BD-R/BD-RE) created during dubbing, the titles cannot be deleted.
For BDMV disc (BD-R) created during direct recording, the titles can be deleted before finalizing the disc. The titles cannot
be deleted after finalization.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Entering characters
Entering Characters
1
Enter characters using the [ 0 ]-[ 9 ], [Z] or [#]
Names can be changed or given to stored videos or groups.
You can enter characters while referring to the input on the
monitor.
buttons
2
After character input is complete, press the
[BLUE] button
Memo:
Character input screen
v
Switch between alphanumeric and symbol input by
pressing the [ w ] button.
v
v
For details on the correspondence between each button
and the input characters, refer to the “Character List”.
4'0#/'ꢎ6+6.'
Press the [ v ] button to delete an input character.
Press and hold down the [ v ] button to delete all input
characters.
4'0#/'ꢎ6*'ꢎ5'.'%6'&ꢎ6+6.'
ꢀꢁ!ꢂꢃ
IJKꢅ
CDEꢄ
LMNꢆ
FGHꢍ
OPQꢇ
24'8ꢀꢎ%*#4#%6'4
2#)'ꢎ248
v
Pressing the [RETURN] button calls up the confirmation
screen to cancel character input.
To cancel character input and return to the initial screen,
select “YES” and press the [OK] button.
To return to the character input screen, select “NO” and
press the [OK] button.
0':6ꢎ%*#4#%6'4
2#)'ꢎ0':6
RSTUꢈ
VWXꢉ
ꢊ
YZ[\ꢌ
ꢋ
%*#4#%6'4ꢎ6;2'
%.'#4
v
5'.'%6
126+10
Up to about 20 alphanumeric characters can be displayed
on the disc menu of BDMV and DVD-VIDEO. (The number
of characters that can be displayed varies with the
character.)
1-
4'6740
':+6
%10(+4/
+0(1ꢀ%144'%6
A Function name field
B Screen description
C Input window
Note:
v
If you switch the screen display before confirming the input
characters, a message will appear on the screen.
To cancel character input and return to the initial screen,
select “STOP” and press the [OK] button.
Characters entered appear on the input window.
D Operation guide 1
The [ 0 ]-[ 9 ], [Z], [#], [PAGE PRV], [PAGE NEXT], [w] and
[v] buttons are displayed.
To return to the character input screen, select “BACK” and
press the [OK] button.
v
If the converted characters exceed the maximum number of
input characters, a message will appear on the screen.
Select “OK” and press the [OK] button to delete the excess
characters and to input the remaining ones.
E Operation guide 2
[ J / K / H / I], [OK], [RETURN], [OPTION], [BLUE], [RED],
[GREEN] and [YELLOW] buttons are displayed.
Select “RETURN” and press the [OK] button to restore the
unconfirmed characters.
F Character input keyboard
v
No more characters can be input if the maximum character
limit has been reached.
A character input keyboard appears during input of symbol.
You can enter characters by selecting them accordingly from
the keyboard.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Character List
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[0]
[*]
.
a
d
g
j
,
!
A
D
T
J
1
B
E
G
K
N
P
U
W
_
-
(
ä
è
I
)
æ
é
ì
@
å
ê
í
/
à
ë
î
:
á
ð
ï
_
â
È
Ì
?
c
f
b
C
F
H
L
ã
É
Í
ç
Ê
Î
Æ
Ð
4
Ç
2
Ä
Ë
Ï
Å
3
À
Ô
;
Á
Õ
<
Â
Ñ
=
Ã
6
>
e
.
h
k
n
q
u
x
.
i
£
ö
R
ù
Y
5
ø
S
ú
Z
!
l
m
p
t
M
s
O
Q
V
X
/
ò
ÿ
û
ý
?
ó
ß
ü
þ
~
ô
$
Ù
Ý
(
õ
7
Ú
Þ
)
ñ
Ö
Ü
#
Ø
8
Ò
Ó
^
o
r
T
z
Û
9
*
v
y
@
-
w
0
,
*1
[
-
:
+
,
$
>
%
&
]
'
`
{
|
}
*1
.
~
!
?
:
*1 Single-byte space
:
*2 Press the [#] button to return to the previous input character.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
5
Select “GROUP”, and press the [OK] button
The selected titles and groups are now grouped together.
v
Grouping
Multiple titles stored on the HDD can be combined into a
group.
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
Memo:
v
)4172
#..
Only video data stored on the HDD can be grouped.
)4172
6*'ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ6+6.'5ꢄ9+..ꢄ$'ꢄ)4172'&ꢄ61)'6*'4ꢄ
;17ꢄ%#0ꢄ/1&+(;ꢄ6*'ꢄ)4172ꢄ0#/'ꢄ(41/ꢄ
̌'&+6ꢄ+0(1̍ꢄ70&'4ꢄ6*'ꢄ126+10ꢄ/'07
Grouping
)4172
$#%-
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
v
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
2
4'6740
Select the titles or groups to be grouped, and
press the [MARK] button
Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the
selected titles/groups.
All titles and groups with the check mark will be grouped
together.
v
Memo:
v
To cancel grouping, select “BACK” and press the [OK]
button.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
grouping and return to the initial screen.
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
Ungrouping
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
v
2
Select the group to ungroup, and press the
[OPTION] button
A pop-up option list appears.
v
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
3
Select “UNGROUP”, and press the [OK] button
v
An ungroup confirmation screen appears.
3
Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control
unit
A pop-up option list appears.
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
v
2+%674'
$#%-
2.#;
4
Select “GROUP”, and press the [OK] button
A grouping confirmation screen appears.
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
v
001
002
003
004
008
70)4172
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
6+6.'ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
VKVNG
126+105
2+%674'
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
005
006
007
$#%-
2.#;
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
)4172
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
/1&'ꢀ%*#0)'
'&+6
4'6740
'&+6ꢀ+0(1
16*'45
Memo:
v
You cannot ungroup multiple groups at the same time.
When multiple groups are selected, the “UNGROUP” item
does not appear in the option list.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
4
3
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button
All titles within the selected group are ungrouped.
Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control
unit
A pop-up option list appears.
v
v
6+6.'ꢃꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4
Select “DO NOT GROUP”, and press the [OK]
button
A confirmation screen for group exclusion appears.
4'/#+0+0)ꢃ4'%14&+0)ꢃ6+/'ꢃꢃ:2
2CIG
ꢄ
ꢀꢁꢂꢃOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
v
)4172
#..
5
70)4172
6*'ꢃ5'.'%6'&ꢃ)4172ꢃ9+..ꢃ$'ꢃ70)4172'&ꢃ
70)4172!
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button
The selected titles are now excluded from the group.
v
;'5
01
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢃ2)
0':6ꢃ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
4'6740
&1ꢄ016ꢄ)4172
6*'ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ6+6.'ꢅ5ꢆꢄ9+..ꢄ$'ꢄ4'/18'&ꢄ(41/ꢄ6*+5ꢄ)4172ꢄ
4'/18'ꢄ(41/ꢄ)4172!
Memo:
;'5
01
v
To cancel ungrouping, select “NO” and press the [OK]
button.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
ungrouping and return to the initial screen.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
4'6740
Memo:
Excluding from a group
You can select titles and exclude them from a group.
v
To cancel, select “NO” and press the [OK] button.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
group exclusion and return to the initial screen.
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
v
2
Select the titles to exclude from the group, and
press the [MARK] button
Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the
selected titles/groups.
v
All titles with the check mark will be excluded from the
group.
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Changing the Title/Group
Name
Deleting a Title/Group
Titles/groups can be deleted. When you delete a group, all
titles contained within the group are deleted.
The saved title/group name can be changed as follows.
Memo:
Memo:
v
When a title/group is deleted from the HDD, BD-RE, or
v
A title/group name can be added to video data stored on
DVD-RW, the remaining space on the media increases
according to the size of the deleted title/group.
Deleting a title/group from a BD-R or DVD-R does not
increase the amount of available space on the disc.
the HDD, BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RW, or DVD-R, and the
name can be changed.
v
For video data stored on a DVD-RW or DVD-R in the Video
mode, the title/group name cannot be changed. However,
you can change the name if the disc has not been finalized.
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
v
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
2
Select the titles/groups to delete, and press the
[OPTION] button
v
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
2
Select the title/group for which the name is to be
changed, and press the [OPTION] button
v
To delete the entire group, select the thumbnails with the
group icon indication.
v
A pop-up option list appears.
v
Pressing the button displays a pop-up option list.
3
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button
An information editing screen appears.
3
Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button
A confirmation screen for title/group deletion appears.
v
v
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
126+105
2+%674'
$#%-
$#%-
2.#;
)4172
#..
2.#;
&'.'6'
&7$
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
001
002
003
004
008
001
002
003
004
008
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
VKVNG
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
VKVNG
16*'45
005
006
007
005
006
007
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
4'6740
4
Select “MODIFY TITLE NAME” or “MODIFY
GROUP NAME”, and press the [OK] button
A title/group name modifying screen appears.
4
Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button
The selected titles/groups are deleted.
v
v
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
)4172
#..
001
&'.'6'
+0(14/#6+10ꢄ%144'%6
/1&+(;ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ0#/'
001
0
0
004
008
&1ꢄ;17ꢄ9#06ꢄ61ꢄ&'.'6'!
/1&+(;ꢄ6*7/$0#+.
%*#0)'ꢄ5*116+0)ꢄ'ꢇ6+/'
2416'%6
VKVNG
&'.'6'
$#%-
VKVNG
005
005
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
5'.'%6
1-
0#8+)#6+10
126+10
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
126+10
4'6740
Memo:
v
5
Modify the title/group name
The modified title/group name is now saved.
To cancel the title/group deletion operation, select “BACK”
and press the [OK] button.
v
v
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
the deletion operation and return to the initial screen.
Memo:
v
For details on the method of character input, refer to
Titles recorded directly to a BDMV disc can be deleted by
pressing the [DELETE] button on the remote control when
the title is currently being played.
During playback of a title, you can also delete it by pressing
the [OPTION] button and selecting “DELETE”.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
4
Select “PROTECT”, and press the [OK] button
If only a single title was selected in step 2, a confirmation
screen for title protection will appear.
v
Turning On Title/Group
Protection
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
Titles/groups can be protected.
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
Editing and deletion cannot be performed on protected titles/
groups.
)4172
#..
v
Title/group protection can be turned on for video data
2416'%6
6*'ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ9+..ꢄ$'ꢄ2416'%6'&ꢄ
&1ꢄ;17ꢄ9#06ꢄ61ꢄ5'6ꢄ2416'%6+10!
stored on the HDD, BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), and
DVD-RW (VR).
;'5
01
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
v
5'.'%6
126+10
2
1-
Select the titles/groups to be protected, and
press the [OPTION] button
A pop-up option list appears.
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
4'6740
v
v
If multiple titles or groups were selected in step 2,
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
“PROTECT” and “UNPROTECT” items will be displayed.
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
5
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button
The selected titles/groups are now protected.
$#%-
2.#;
v
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
Memo:
001
002
003
004
008
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
v
All selected titles and groups will be protected when
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
multiple titles or groups are selected.
VKVNG
v
v
005
006
007
To turn off the title/group protection, select “NO” and press
the [OK] button.
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to turn
off the protection and return to the initial screen.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
3
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button
An information editing screen appears.
v
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
+0(14/#6+10ꢄ%144'%6
/1&+(;ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ0#/'
001
0
0
004
008
/1&+(;ꢄ6*7/$0#+.
%*#0)'ꢄ5*116+0)ꢄ'ꢇ6+/'
2416'%6
VKVNG
005
5'.'%6
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
126+10
4'6740
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
4
Select “UNPROTECT”, and press the [OK] button
If only a single title was selected in step 2, a confirmation
screen for turning off protection will appear.
v
Turning Off Title/Group
Protection
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
Protection of a title/group can be turned off.
Titles/groups can be edited and deleted after their protection
is turned off.
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
v
Title/group protection can be turned off for video data
702416'%6
:::ꢄ6+6.'5ꢄ*#8'ꢄ$''0ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ61ꢄ4'/18'ꢄ6*'ꢄ2416'%6+10
stored on the HDD, BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), and
DVD-RW (VR).
;'5
01
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
v
5'.'%6
126+10
2
1-
Select the titles/groups to turn off protection for,
and press the [OPTION] button
A pop-up option list appears.
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
4'6740
v
v
If multiple titles or groups were selected in step 2,
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
“UNPROTECT” and “PROTECT” items will be displayed.
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
5
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button
Protection of the selected titles/groups is now turned off.
$#%-
2.#;
v
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
Memo:
001
002
003
004
008
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
v
Protection will be turned off from all selected titles and
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
groups when multiple titles or groups are selected.
VKVNG
v
v
005
006
007
If you do not want to turn off the title/group protection,
select “NO” and press the [OK] button.
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
protection removal and return to the initial screen.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
3
Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button
An information editing screen appears.
v
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
+0(14/#6+10ꢄ%144'%6
001
0
0
004
008
/1&+(;ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ0#/'
/1&+(;ꢄ6*7/$0#+.
%*#0)'ꢄ5*116+0)ꢄ'ꢇ6+/'
702416'%6
VKVNG
005
5'.'%6
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
126+10
4'6740
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
5
Edit the playlist accordingly by selecting
chapters from the source title according to your
preference
Edit the playlist.
For details, refer to “Editing the playlist”.
Creating a Playlist
A playlist can be created from the video titles on the HDD.
v
v
Playlists can only be created for titles that are stored on the
HDD.
:
Playlist
Enables you to create a program by selecting
chapters from a specific title and editing their
playback sequence.
2.#;.+56ꢃ'&+6
5#8'ꢃ2.#;.+56
'&+6ꢃ2.#;.+56
5174%'ꢃ6+6.'
2CIG
Memo:
v
The playlist created comes in handy during playback and
dubbing to a disc.
ꢀꢀꢁ ꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀ
2CIG
6#4)'6ꢃ2.#;.+56
Creating a Playlist
ꢀꢀꢁ ꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀ
1
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢃ2)
0':6ꢃ2)
':+6
'&+6
5#8'
4'6740
v
The Playback Navigation screen appears.
6
Press the [BLUE] button on the remote control
unit
A playlist is created.
2
Select the title for which a playlist is to be
created, and press the [OPTION] button
v
3
Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button
The Edit menu screen appears.
v
Editing the playlist
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
m
2+%674'
Chapter insertion
$#%-
2.#;
① Select the chapter to insert from the thumbnails of
the “SOURCE TITLE”, and press the [OK] button
② Select the position to insert the chapter from the
“TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK] button
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
001
002
003
004
008
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
VKVNG
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
m
005
006
007
Chapter deletion
① Select the chapter to delete from the thumbnails of
the “TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK] button
② Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
m
Entering the playlist name
4
Select “PLAYLIST EDIT”, and press the [OK]
button
The playlist edit screen appears.
① Select “TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK]
button.
v
② Enter a playlist name, and press the [OK] button
Memo:
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
v
For details on the method of character input, refer to
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
Note:
)4172
#..
'&+6
v
Deleting the original title list will cause the playlist to be
deleted as well.
Editing the original title list, or changing the recording mode
may cause the playlist to be deleted.
001
0
%*#26'4ꢄ'&+6
004
008
2.#;.+56ꢄ'&+6
&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'
VKVNG
005
0
&+8+&'
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
4
Select “CHANGE”, and press the [OK] button
The displayed still image now becomes the thumbnail
image.
v
Editing a Thumbnail
Thumbnails (index images) can be changed to a still image
according to your preference.
5
Select “CONFIRM”, and press the [OK] button
Doing so ends the editing of thumbnails.
v
Memo:
v
Thumbnails of titles stored on the HDD, BD-RE, BD-R,
Memo:
v
DVD-RW, and DVD-R can be edited.
You can also display the thumbnail modification screen
from the Playback Navigation screen.
v
However, thumbnails of titles that are stored on an SD card
or finalized disc cannot be edited.
① Select the title for which the thumbnail is to be
changed, and press the [OPTION] button
1
Press the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button on
the remote control unit
An information editing screen appears.
② Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button
v
An information editing screen appears.
v
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
$#%-
2.#;
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
001
002
003
004
008
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ'ꢁ6+/'
2416'%6
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
VKVNG
005
006
007
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
③ Select “MODIFY THUMBNAIL”, and press the [OK]
2
Select “MODIFY THUMBNAIL”, and press the
[OK] button
A thumbnail modification screen appears.
button
v
A thumbnail modification screen appears.
v
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
3
Play the video, and press the [W] button to stop
at the scene you want to use as thumbnail
display
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
+0(14/#6+10ꢄ%144'%6
/1&+(;ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ0#/'
001
0
0
004
008
/1&+(;ꢃ6*7/$0#+.
/1&+(;ꢄ6*7/$0#+.
%*#0)'ꢄ5*116+0)ꢄ'ꢇ6+/'
2416'%6
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ%*#0)'ꢃ6*'ꢃ6+6.'ꢃ6*7/$0#+.5
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ'&+6ꢃ6*'ꢃ6+6.'ꢃ61ꢃ8+'9ꢃ$;ꢃ%*#26'45
VKVNG
005
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀ
%*#0)'
%10(+4/
5'.'%6
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
126+10
4'6740
6*7/$0#+.
- : -- : --
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
+0(1ꢂ%144'%6
126+10
4'6740
Memo:
v
For details on the button operations during playback, refer
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Editing a chapter
Editing a Chapter
1
Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control
Creating a chapter mark for a saved title enables you to find a
specific scene within the title.
unit
v
The Edit menu screen appears.
Memo:
v
2
All chapter editing functions can be performed on titles
Select “CHAPTER EDIT”, and press the [OK]
button
The title screen appears.
stored on the HDD.
v
Titles stored on a BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), DVD-R
(VR), or DVD-RW (VR) only allow chapters to be divided or
combined.
v
The chapters of titles that are stored on an SD card or
finalized disc cannot be edited.
v
Also, protected titles cannot be edited. To perform chapter
'&+6
edit of a title, turn off the protection.
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'
&+8+&'
Chapter edit functions
v
Chapter mark insertion (divide chapter)
Divides a chapter by inserting a chapter mark.
v
3
Select a title, and press the [OK] button
Chapter mark deletion (combine chapters)
Memo:
Combine chapters by deleting the chapter mark.
v
The chapter edit screen can also be called up from the
v
Chapter deletion
Playback Navigation screen.
Deletes a specified chapter.
① Select the title to perform chapter edit, and press the
[OPTION] button
② Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
$#%-
2.#;
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
001
002
003
004
008
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
VKVNG
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
005
006
007
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
③ Select “CHAPTER EDIT”, and press the [OK] button
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
)4172
#..
'&+6
001
0
%*#26'4ꢄ'&+6
004
008
2.#;.+56ꢄ'&+6
&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'
VKVNG
005
0
&+8+&'
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
v
v
For details on the button operations during playback, refer
Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
m
Deleting a video chapter
Editing a Chapter
(Continued)
1
Select the chapter for which you want to delete
the video from the chapter edit screen
2
Press the [DELETE] button on the remote control
unit
A confirmation screen for deleting the chapter appears.
m
Chapter mark insertion (divide chapter)
1
Play the video, and press the [W] button to stop
at the scene you want to add a chapter mark
v
2
Press the [MARK] button on the remote control
unit
A chapter mark is inserted into the paused scene.
%
%
*
*
#
#
2
266''4ꢀ4'ꢀ&'+&6+6
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45
2CIG
v
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6
%*
*
#
#
2
266''4ꢀ4'ꢀ&'+&6+6
6*'ꢀ52'%+(+'&ꢀ%*#26'4ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ&'.'6'&
&'.'6'&ꢀ#ꢀ%#0016ꢀ$'ꢀ4'5614'&
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45
2CIG
&'.'6'
%#0%'.
%10(+4/
001
0 : 00 : 00
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
'&+6
4'6740
3
Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button
The selected video chapter is deleted.
001
0 : 00 : 00
v
5'.'%6
126+10
':+6
'&+6
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
4'6740
Note:
v
Videos cannot be restored once they are deleted.
Memo:
v
Deletion of the video may fail if the length of the chapter is
too short.
v
The chapter is now divided into two parts at the position of
the chapter mark.
m
Chapter mark deletion (combine chapters)
Chapter options
Pressing the [OPTION] button on the remote control when the
Chapter Edit screen is displayed enables you to perform the
following editing operations.
1
Play the video, and press the [W] and [ H / I ]
buttons to display the scene for which you want
to delete the chapter mark
2
Press the [MARK] button on the remote control
unit
A confirmation screen for deleting the chapter mark
appears.
m
Combining with previous chapter
Combines the selected chapter with the previous chapter.
v
v
① Select a chapter, followed by “COMB. W/PREV CH”,
and press the [OK] button
Combines chapters.
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6
v
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45
2CIG
m
Combining with next chapter
Combines the selected chapter with the next chapter.
v
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6
① Select a chapter, followed by “COMB. W/NEXT CH”,
%*#26'4ꢀ/#4-ꢀ#.4'#&;ꢀ':+565ꢁ
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&'.'6'ꢀ6*'
':+56+0)ꢀ%*#26'4ꢀ/#4-!
and press the [OK] button
v
;'5
01
Combines chapters.
m
Combining all chapters
Combines all chapters.
v
001
0 : 00 : 00
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢀ2)
0':6ꢀ2)
':+6
'&+6
① Select “COMB. ALL CHAP.”, and press the [OK]
4'6740
button
v
A confirmation screen for combining all the chapters is
3
Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button
The chapter mark is deleted from the selected scene.
displayed.
v
② Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button
Memo:
v
Combines all the chapters.
v
The chapters before and after the position of the chapter
mark are now combined.
v
Pressing the [T / S] button displays the next/previous
page.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
6
Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button
A confirmation screen for performing dividing appears.
v
Dividing
You can select a saved title and divide it into two titles.
&+8+&'
Memo:
v
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'
'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+ .'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45
Dividing can only be applied to titles stored on the HDD.
v
Titles that are protected cannot be divided. To divide a title,
turn off the protection.
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06
':'%76'
14+)+0#.
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06
Dividing
001
0 : 00 : 00
- : -- : --
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
1
Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control
unit
The Edit menu screen appears.
'&+6
126+10
v
7
Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button
Dividing starts.
2
v
Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button
The title screen appears.
v
&+8+&'
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'
'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+ .'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45
&+8+&'
'&+6
70#$.'ꢀ61ꢀ4'5614'ꢀ6*'ꢀ14+)+0#.ꢀ#ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ+5ꢀ&+8+&'&ꢁ
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&+8+&'!
&+8+&'
%#0%'.
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'
&+8+&'
14+)+0#.
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06
001
0 : 00 : 00
- : -- : --
5'.'%6
':+6
'&+6
1-
4'6740
126+10
3
4
Select a title, and press the [OK] button
Play the video, and press the [W] button at the
scene where you want to perform dividing
5
Select “DIVIDING POINT”, and press the [OK]
button
&+8+&'
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06
':'%76'
14+)+0#.
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06
001
0 : 00 : 00
- : -- : --
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
':+6
'&+6
Memo:
v
For details on the button operations during playback, refer
v
Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Dividing (Continued)
Delete Scenes
Unwanted scenes of a saved title can be deleted.
Doing so helps to increase the free space on the disc.
Memo:
v
To cancel the dividing operation, select “CANCEL” and
press the [OK] button.
Memo:
v
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
Deleting scenes can only be applied to titles stored on the
the divide operation and return to the initial screen.
HDD.
v
v
The dividing edit screen can also be called up from the
Titles that are protected cannot be deleted. To enable
Playback Navigation screen.
scene delete of a title, turn off the protection.
① Select the titles to divide, and press the [OPTION]
button
v
② Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button
HD content for which the delete scene operation has been
applied cannot be dubbed to BDMV. Perform seamless
conversion before starting a dubbing operation.
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
2+%674'
$#%-
2.#;
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
001
002
003
004
008
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
Delete Scenes
1
VKVNG
Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control
unit
The Edit menu screen appears.
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
005
006
007
v
2
Select “DELETE SCENE”, and press the [OK]
button
Displays the Title Display screen.
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
4'6740
v
③ Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
'&+6
)4172
#..
'&+6
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6
001
0
%*#26'4ꢄ'&+6
004
008
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'
&+8+&'
2.#;.+56ꢄ'&+6
&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'
VKVNG
005
0
&+8+&'
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
3
4
Select a title, and press the [OK] button
Edit the delete scene section
Follow the steps below to edit the section for which delete
scene is to be applied.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
5
Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button
A confirmation screen for performing scene delete appears.
① Play the video, and press the [W] button at the point
where you want to start the delete operation
② Select “START”, and press the [OK] button
v
6
Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button
Scene deletion starts.
v
&'.'6'ꢂ5%'0'
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ&'.'6'ꢂ5%'0'5
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀ
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'5
56#46
'0&
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢂ
0':6
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'
':'%76'
6*'ꢃ52'%+(+'&ꢃ5'%6+10ꢃꢄ::ꢃ5')/'06ꢄ5ꢅꢅꢃ9+..ꢃ$'ꢃ&'.'6'&
':'%76'
56#46
%#0%'.
56#46
'0&
- : -- : --
- : -- : --
'0&
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
':+6
'&+6
001
0 : 00 : 00
001
1-
4'6740
0 : 00 : 09
5'.'%6
126+10
':+6
'&+6
③ Play the video, and press the [W] button at the point
where you want to end the delete operation
④ Select “END”, and press the [OK] button
Memo:
v
To cancel the delete scene operation, select “CANCEL”
and press the [OK] button.
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'5
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢂ
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
delete scene and return to the initial screen.
56#46
'0&
0':6
':'%76'
56#46
'0&
001
0 : 00 : 03
- : -- : --
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
':+6
'&+6
⑤ To continue specifying other sections to delete,
select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button
&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'
;17ꢄ%#0ꢄ&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'5
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃ
56#46
'0&
0':6
':'%76'
56#46
'0&
001
0 : 00 : 03
001
1-
4'6740
0 : 00 : 17
5'.'%6
126+10
':+6
'&+6
⑥ Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to specify the sections to delete
Memo:
v
For details on the button operations during playback, refer
v
Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
Changing the Disc Name
Changing the Shooting
Date/Time
The name of a BD or DVD disc can be changed as follows.
1
Set the BD or DVD for which the disc name is to
be changed on the disc tray
The date/time of the stored video can be changed as follows.
v
The shooting date/time of videos stored on the HDD can be
changed.
2
Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the
remote control unit
1
Press the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button on
the remote control unit
v
The Media Management menu screen appears.
v
An information correct screen appears.
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06
$&ꢁ&8&
(14/#6
(+0#.+<'
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%
5&ꢀ%#4&
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ'ꢁ6+/'
2416'%6
(14/#6
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ#ꢀ'4#5'
*&&
(14/#6
3
Select “RENAME DISC” under “BD/DVD”, and
press the [OK] button
A disc name modification screen appears.
2
Select “CHANGE SHOOTING DATE/TIME”, and
press the [OK] button
A thumbnail screen appears.
v
v
4'0#/'ꢎ&+5%
3
Select the title for which the shooting date/time
is to be changed, and press the [OK] button
The screen for changing the shooting date/time appears.
2.'#5'ꢎ4'0#/'ꢎ6*'ꢎ&+5%
v
ꢀꢁ!ꢂꢃ
IJKꢅ
CDEꢄ
LMNꢆ
FGHꢍ
OPQꢇ
24'8ꢀꢎ%*#4#%6'4
2#)'ꢎ248
4
Change the shooting date/time
Perform the following steps to change the shooting date/
time.
0':6ꢎ%*#4#%6'4
2#)'ꢎ0':6
v
RSTUꢈ
VWXꢉ
ꢊ
YZ[\ꢌ
ꢋ
%*#4#%6'4ꢎ6;2'
%.'#4
6+6.'ꢄꢆ6*7/$0#+.ꢇ
+0(1ꢅꢄ%144'%6
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
4'6740
':+6
%10(+4/
/'&+#ꢎ/#0#)'
)4172
#..
%*#0)'ꢄ5*116+0)ꢄ'ꢋ6+/'
;'#4
ꢈꢉꢉꢊ
4
Modifying the Disc Name
The new disc name is now saved.
/106*ꢋ&#;
6+/'
,#0ꢋꢉꢌ
#/ꢁꢀꢈꢈ
v
'06'4
Memo:
v
For details on the method of character input, refer to
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
+0(1ꢅꢄ%144'%6
4'6740
① Use the [ J ] and [ K ] buttons to move the cursor to
the item you want to change
② Press the [OK] button to display the pop-up screen
③ Use the [ J ] and [ K ] buttons to select a desired
value
④ Press the [OK] button to choose the value
⑤ Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to change settings for any
desired items
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing
5
Select “ENTER”, and press the [OK] button
The modified shooting date/time is saved.
v
Mode conversion
Memo:
You can convert HD quality video titles saved on the HDD if
they are recorded in the DR, AVC, AF, AN, AL, or AE mode.
v
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel
the shooting date/time modification and return to the initial
screen.
:
Seamless
conversion
Seamless conversion can be performed to
enable smooth playback of joined scenes
after dubbing to a BD. (Titles recorded in
the DR recording mode h seamless)
v
v
The shooting date/time modification will not be reflected on
a title that was dubbed.
Pressing the [OPTION] button in the playback navigation
screen instead of the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button
will also display the shooting date/time edit screen.
:
Recording
mode
conversion
Enables conversion of recording mode.
(Titles recorded in the DR, AVC, AF, AN,
AL, or AE mode h
① Select the title for which the shooting date/time is to
be changed, and press the [OPTION] button
② Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button
AF/AN/AL/AE/XP/SP/LP/EP)
Memo:
v
As seamless conversion does not re-encode video and
audio, there is no deterioration in the image quality.
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ
0#8+)#6+10
8+&'1
126+105
v
v
v
2+%674'
Re-encoding is performed during recording mode
conversion.
$#%-
2.#;
)4172
#..
&'.'6'
&7$
Only titles that are recorded in the DR mode enable
conversion to the XP/SP/LP/EP mode.
001
002
003
004
008
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'
'&+6
To apply “MODE CHANGE” after turning off the power,
select “AFTER POWER OFF” for “START METHOD” under
the “MODE CHANGE”.
'&+6ꢂ+0(1
16*'45
VKVNG
005
006
007
Note:
v
When seamless conversion is performed, the chapters
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢂ2)
0':6ꢂ2)
':+6
0#8+)#6+10
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
(excluding joints of scenes) will be combined. To divide the
chapters, insert chapter marks after seamless conversion.
4'6740
③ Select “CHANGE SHOOTING DATE/TIME”, and
press the [OK] button
1
2
Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote
control unit
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
Select a title/group, and press the [OPTION]
button
)4172
#..
+0(14/#6+10ꢄ%144'%6
/1&+(;ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ0#/'
3
Select “MODE CHANGE” from the Option menu,
and press the [OK] button
The “MODE CHANGE” screen appears.
001
0
0
004
008
/1&+(;ꢄ6*7/$0#+.
%*#0)'ꢄ5*116+0)ꢄ'ꢇ6+/'
2416'%6
v
VKVNG
005
6+6.'ꢄꢅ6*7/$0#+.ꢆ
0#8+)#6+10
4'/#+0+0)ꢄ4'%14&+0)ꢄ6+/'ꢄꢄ:2
2CIG
ꢀ
ꢁꢂꢃꢄOKP
8+&'1
2+%674'
5'.'%6
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
)4172
#..
0#8+)#6+10
126+10
4'6740
/1&'ꢄ%*#0)'
/1&'
5'#/.'55
56#46ꢄ/'6*1&
+//'&+#6'
%10(+4/
5'.'%6
126+10
1-
24'8ꢄ2)
0':6ꢄ2)
':+6
.+56
2+%674'
)4172
0#8+)#6+10
4'6740
4
5
Select a recording mode from “MODE”, and
press the [OK] button
Select “CONFIRM”, and press the [OK] button
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
Memo:
Changing Settings of this
Unit
Settings changed in the Settings Menu screen are stored on
this unit even when its power is turned off.
Displaying the Settings Menu
1
Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control
unit
v
The Settings Menu screen appears.
Memo:
v
When playback is in progress, pressing the button stops it
and displays the Settings Menu screen.
v
The cursor position appears at the position when the
screen was last closed.
Setting Menu List
The following items can be set. Items that cannot be set
cannot be selected.
v
The highlighted value is the default setting.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
v
CLOCK SET
SETUP
Sets the current date and time.
Memo:
v
5'672
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢃ1((ꢄ
1((
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55
37+%-ꢀ56#4672
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢂ
v
DATE DISPLAY
For setting the date (year, month, and day) display format.
Setting Values Description
1((
$7<<'4ꢀ176276
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)
YEAR.MONTH.DAY Displays the date in the year/
month/day order.
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
4'6740
MONTH.DAY.YEAR Displays the date in the month/day/
year order.
5'6ꢀ72
DAY.MONTH.YEAR Displays the date in the day/month/
year order.
m
AUTO POWER (OFF)
You can specify a time for the power of the unit to turn off
automatically when it is not being operated.
v
TIME DISPLAY CHOICE
For setting the time display format.
Setting Values
Description
Setting Values
Description
OFF
Power does not turn off automatically.
Turns off power after two hours.
Turns off power after six hours.
12H
24H
Displays the time in AM/PM format.
Displays the time in 24-hour format.
2 HOURS
6 HOURS
m
DIMMER (POWER ON)
m
REMOTE CONTROL CODE
For setting the brightness of the display window when the
power is turned “On”.
For remote control units compliant with JVC’s products,
different remote control codes can be specified for those that
are used with this unit.
Setting Values Description
BRIGHT
DIMMED1
DIMMED2
DIMMED3
OFF
Bright
Slightly dim
Dim
Setting Values
Description
REMOTE CONTROL 1 Sets remote control code to 1.
REMOTE CONTROL 2 Sets remote control code to 2.
REMOTE CONTROL 3 Sets remote control code to 3.
REMOTE CONTROL 4 Sets remote control code to 4.
Dimmer
Off
m
CLOCK SET/DISPLAY
The current date/time and the display format on the screen
can be specified using the “CLOCK SET”, “DATE DISPLAY”,
and “TIME DISPLAY CHOICE” items.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
PLAYBACK SETTING
Setting Menu List
(Continued)
QUICK STARTUP
For turning on/off the display window during quick startup and
standby mode.
2.#;$#%-ꢀ5'66+0)
m
$&ꢁꢂ&8&ꢁ8+&'1ꢀ2$ꢀ5'66+0)
4'57/'
10
#761
10
56+..ꢀ/1&'
5'#/.'55ꢀ2.#;$#%-
Setting
Values
Description
OFF
Starts up in the normal way. Display window
turns off during standby mode.
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
5'6ꢀ72
4'6740
ON
Operation is speedily enabled after turning on
the power. (Quick start)
Display window turns on during standby
mode.
m
BD-/DVD-VIDEO PB SETTING
BD-Video and DVD-Video playback settings can be specified
using the “BD-VIDEO RATINGS”, “COUNTRY CODE”,
“AUDIO LANGUAGE”, “SUBTITLE LANGUAGE”, and “MENU
LANGUAGE” items.
Memo:
v
When “QUICK STARTUP” is set to “OFF” for the purposes
of environmental care, the display window turns off during
standby mode. To turn on the display window during
standby mode, set to “ON”.
v
BD-VIDEO RATINGS
For setting the lower age limit for BD-Video ratings.
v
Setting to “ON” increases power consumption while the unit
is in the standby mode.
Setting Values
Description
NO LIMIT
All BD-Videos can be viewed.
m
BUZZER OUTPUT
254 YEAR(S)-
0 YEAR(S)
BD-Videos that are subject to the age
limit cannot be viewed.
The buzzer setting can be specified as follows.
v
REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR TONE
Memo:
For setting whether to sound the buzzer when the remote
control sensor receives signals.
v
In order to set the restrictions, password (four-digit
number) registration is required.
Setting
Values
Description
v
The password status becomes unregistered if the
restriction setting is disabled. A new password can be
registered after setting the age limit again.
OFF
Buzzer does not sound when the remote
control sensor receives signals.
v
v
It is recommended that you note down the password in
case it is lost or forgotten.
ON
Sounds the buzzer when the remote control
sensor receives signals.
COUNTRY CODE
For setting the country code.
v
ALERT/WARNING TONE
For setting whether to sound the buzzer when an operation is
completed or when a warning message appears.
Memo:
Setting Values
Description
v
If the “BD-VIDEO RATINGS” setting is specified, you will
be required to enter the password registered for the “BD-
VIDEO RATINGS” in order to change the “COUNTRY
CODE”.
OFF
ON
Buzzer does not sound.
Sounds the buzzer.
v
AUDIO LANGUAGE
m
DEFAULT SETTING
For setting the audio sound when playing back BD-Videos
or DVD-Videos.
Restores the setting values on the setting screen to their
factory default values.
Setting
Values
Description
v
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
YES
Restores the factory default values.
For setting the subtitle language when playing back BD-
Videos or DVD-Videos.
NO
Returns to the initial screen without
resetting the values.
v
Memo:
MENU LANGUAGE
v
“BD-VIDEO RATINGS” and “COUNTRY CODE” settings
cannot be reset once they have been specified.
For setting the menu language when playing back BD-
Videos or DVD-Videos.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
m
RESUME
RECORD
The stop position can be stored when playback of a BD-
Video, DVD-Video, BDMV, AVCHD, finalized discs, or SD
card is stopped halfway.
4'%14&
Setting Values
Description
:2ꢀ/1&'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ#7&+1 &QND[ꢀ&KIKVCN
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)
#761ꢀ/#4-+0)
1((
OFF
ON
Resume information is not stored.
Stores resume information.
Memo:
v
Resume information is stored at all times for other discs as
well as the HDD regardless of this setting.
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
5'6ꢀ72
v
4'6740
When a HDD title is selected using Playback Navigation, it
is played back from the beginning.
v
Some discs do not allow playback from the resume point.
m
XP MODE RECORDING AUDIO
m
For changing the settings of audio mode during recording in
the XP mode.
STILL MODE
For setting the method for displaying paused images during
playback of the HDD or a disc.
Setting Values
Dolby Digital
LPCM
Description
Setting
Values
Description
Records in “Dolby Digital”.
Records in “LPCM”.
AUTO
Automatic control.
m
HIGH-SPEED DUBBING
FIELD
Use this setting for moving images or when
there is blurring in the “AUTO” mode.
Items under “VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT” and
“DISC RECORDING AUDIO” can be set to support high-
speed dubbing.
FRAME
Use this setting when detailed patterns or
designs are not clear in the “AUTO” mode.
v
VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT
Memo:
For setting the aspect ratio during recording.
v
This setting is disabled for programs in the DR mode and
during playback of AVCHD videos.
Setting
Values
Description
m
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK
AUTO
Performs recording in the aspect ratio
setting when recording starts.
For setting the method for playing back partially erased
scenes.
4:3
Records at the fixed aspect ratio of 4:3.
Records at the fixed aspect ratio of 16:9.
Setting Values
Description
16:9
OFF
ON
Plays back with high accuracy.
Plays back smoothly.
Memo:
v
High-speed dubbing to a DVD-Video disc cannot be
performed when there are different aspect ratios in a title.
In this case, fix the aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9. This setting
remains valid during re-encode dubbing.
Memo:
v
SD picture quality is retained during re-encode dubbing.
v
For joints of scenes that are 15 seconds or shorter,
seamless playback may fail even when it is set to “ON”.
The same applies during re-encode dubbing in the SD
picture quality.
For details on high-speed dubbing and re-encode dubbing,
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
AUDIO
Setting Menu List
(Continued)
v
#7&+1
DISC RECORDING AUDIO
&;0#/+%ꢀ4#0)'ꢀ%10641.
&190ꢀ/+:
10
For changing the settings of audio to be recorded to the disc
when in the AF, AN, AE or AL mode.
56'4'1
&+)+6#.ꢀ176
56'4'1ꢀꢁ
10
&8ꢀ+0ꢀ#7&+1ꢀ5'66+0)
$&ꢀ/+:ꢀ5170&
Setting
Values
Description
AUTO
Records “Stereo”, “Surround” or “Dual
broadcast” audio sounds as they are.
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
5'6ꢀ72
FIXED
Records “Stereo” and “Surround” sounds in
“Stereo”. “Dual broadcast” audio sounds are
recorded as they are.
4'6740
m
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL
For setting the dynamic range compression ratio (ratio
between the maximum and minimum volume) during Dolby
Digital playback.
Memo:
v
Surround sounds of a title become stereo sounds when re-
encode dubbing is performed.
m
Setting Values
Description
AUTO MARKING
During direct recording to a recording media (HDD or optical
disc), you can append chapters by adding a mark at a fixed
interval of 10 minutes or 1 hour.
AUTO
Perform compression only for Dolby
TrueHD.
OFF
ON
Not compressed.
Setting Values
Description
Perform maximum compression.
OFF
Disables addition of chapters.
Adds chapters at 10-minute intervals.
Adds chapters at 1-hour intervals.
Memo:
10 MINUTES
1 HOUR
v
Setting to “OFF” may produce the same effects as the “ON”
mode for some discs.
v
v
Performing compression allows even the slightest sound to
be heard clearly.
Memo:
v
Regardless of whether “AUTO MARKING” is set to “OFF”,
“10 MINUTES”, or “1 HOUR”, you can perform manual
marking using the Mark button on the remote control.
During manual marking, an on-screen message is
displayed regardless of the “ON SCREEN GUIDE” setting
under “DISPLAY”.
There may be differences in the effect depending on the
disc used.
m
DOWN MIX
For setting whether to output analog audio.
Setting Values
Description
STEREO
Use this setting when connecting an
audio amplifier or TV.
DOLBY
SURROUND
Use this setting when connecting an
amplifier that supports Dolby
Surround.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
v
DTS-HD
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.
m
DIGITAL OUT
Set this item according to the device connected to the digital
audio output terminal (optical digital).
Setting Values
Description
v
PCM DOWN SAMPLING
BITSTREAM
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is able to decode “DTS-HD”.
For specifying settings on sampling frequency conversion.
Setting
Values
Description
PCM
Audio input will be changed and output as
“PCM”.
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is unable to decode “DTS-
HD”.
OFF
Sampling frequency is not converted.
ON
Audio recorded at a sampling frequency of
96 kHz or 88.2 kHz is converted to 48 kHz
and 44.1 kHz respectively.
v
AAC
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.
Memo:
Setting Values
Description
v
Setting to “OFF” may produce the same effects as the “ON”
mode for some discs.
BITSTREAM
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is able to decode “AAC”.
v
Dolby Digital
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.
PCM
Audio input will be changed and output as
“PCM”.
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is unable to decode “AAC”.
Setting Values
Description
BITSTREAM
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is able to decode “Dolby
Digital”.
Memo:
v
Audio sound may not be properly played back if the audio
equipment in use does not support “BITSTREAM” output.
In this case, set to “PCM”.
PCM
Audio input will be changed and output as
“PCM”.
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is unable to decode “Dolby
Digital”.
m
DV IN AUDIO SETTING
For changing the audio recording settings during DV input.
v
Dolby Digital Plus/TrueHD
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.
Setting Values
Description
STEREO 1
Records the audio sound during video
recording (L1, R1).
Setting Values
Description
BITSTREAM
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is able to decode “Dolby
Digital Plus/TrueHD”.
STEREO 2
MIX
Records audio sound that is added later
(L2, R2), such as during editing.
Records “STEREO 1” and “STEREO 2”
sounds.
PCM
Audio input will be changed and output as
“PCM”.
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is unable to decode “Dolby
Digital Plus/TrueHD”.
m
BD MIX SOUND
For setting a mixture of BD video secondary audio and
operation sounds output.
v
DTS
Setting
Values
Description
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.
Setting Values
Description
OFF
Outputs main audio only.
BITSTREAM
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is able to decode “DTS”.
ON
Outputs a mixture of BD video secondary
audio and operation sounds during playback
of BD-Videos that contain BD video
secondary audio and menu operation
sounds.
PCM
Audio input will be changed and output as
“PCM”.
Use this setting when connecting a
device that is unable to decode “DTS”.
Memo:
v
Output is converted to Dolby Digital or DTS according to
the main audio when the “DIGITAL OUT” item is set to
“BITSTREAM”.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
CONNECTION
Setting Menu List
(Continued)
%100'%6+10
/10+614ꢀ6;2'
*&/+ꢀ%100'%6+10
*&/+ꢄ%'%
DISPLAY
1((
%1/210'06ꢀ176276
8+&'1ꢀ+0276ꢀ5'66+0)
*&%2
ꢁꢂꢃꢂK
8+&'1
014/#.
&+52.#;
10ꢀ5%4''0ꢀ)7+&'
$.7'ꢀ$#%-
#761
10
5%4''0ꢀ5#8'4
15&ꢀ.#0)7#)'
10
5'.'%6
':+6
'0).+5*
1-
5'6ꢀ72
4'6740
m
MONITOR TYPE
For setting the aspect ratio according to the connected
monitor.
5'.'%6
1-
':+6
5'6ꢀ72
4'6740
Setting
Values
Description
m
ON SCREEN GUIDE
16:9
Set to this value when connected to
monitors with 16:9 aspect ratio.
For displaying operation details.
Setting Values
Description
16:9FULL
Choose this setting when a 16:9 monitor is
connected to display images without the
black borders.
AUTO
Appears for five seconds when an
operation is performed.
OFF
Not displayed.
4:3
Set to this value when connecting to
PAN&SCAN monitors with an aspect ratio of 4:3. Plays
back videos with the left and right edges
trimmed off.
m
BLUE BACK
For setting the screen display when there is no signal input.
Setting Values
Description
4:3
Set to this value when connecting to
LETTERBOX monitors with an aspect ratio of 4:3. Plays
back videos with a black band at the upper
and lower ends.
OFF
ON
Displays screen as it is.
Switches display to a blue screen.
m
SCREEN SAVER
m
HDMI CONNECTION
VIDEO PRIORITY MODE
Setting Values
For setting whether to use a screensaver.
v
Setting
Values
Description
Description
COMPONENT Set to this value for output at a resolution
of “480p” (NTSC)/“576p” (PAL) or higher
from the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT]
terminal.
OFF
ON
Screen saver is not used.
Screen saver is used. Switches to the burn-
in prevention screen when the unit is not
operated for more than five minutes.
HDMI
Set to this value when priority is to be
given to the “HDMI OUTPUT
RESOLUTION” setting.
m
OSD LANGUAGE
For setting the language for messages displayed on-screen.
Memo:
v
During data output from the [HDMI] terminal, setting to
“COMPONENT” automatically outputs data in the
“COMPONENT OUTPUT” setting.
Setting to “HDMI” outputs data in the “HDMI OUTPUT
RESOLUTION” setting.
v
During data output from the [HDMI] and [COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT] terminals, setting to “COMPONENT”
automatically outputs data in the “COMPONENT OUTPUT”
setting.
Setting to “HDMI” outputs data at the “576i” resolution from
the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.
When there is no output from the [HDMI] terminal, data is
automatically output from the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT]
terminal in the “COMPONENT OUTPUT” resolution.
v
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
v
HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION
Memo:
v
This is applicable when an x.v.Color compatible monitor is
connected.
Setting Values
Description
AUTO
Automatically selects an appropriate
resolution according to the connected
device.
v
Deep Color
Setting
Values
Description
480p (NTSC)
576p (PAL)
Fixes the resolution at 480p or 576p.
AUTO
Set to this value when a “Deep Color” device
is connected.
1080i
720p
Fixes the resolution at 1080i.
Fixes the resolution at 720p.
Fixes the resolution at 1080p.
OFF
Set to this value when the video image is
distorted, or colors are unnatural.
v
1080p
HDMI RGB OUTPUT RANGE
Setting Values
STANDARD
ENHANCED
Description
Memo:
v
When the resolution is set to “720p”, videos are output at
“1080i” other than those recorded at “720p” even though
“720p” is shown on the display.
Set to this value for standard uses.
Set to this value when the black and
white parts of the video image are not
distinct.
v
Depending on the conditions (monitor type 4:3, resolution
“720p” and above, aspect “16:9”), the on-screen display
from the component output may be cut off.
In this case, set “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” to
“COMPONENT”.
The on-screen display from the [VIDEO OUT]/[S-VIDEO
OUT] terminal may be cut off when “VIDEO PRIORITY
MODE” is set to “COMPONENT”.
Memo:
v
This is available when connected to a DVI device that only
supports RGB input.
v
HDMI --> DVI COLOR
Setting
Values
Description
In this case, set “COMPONENT OUTPUT” to “480p”
(NTSC)/“576p” (PAL) or below, or set the monitor type to a
setting other than “16:9”.
AUTO
Value is set automatically according to the
monitor.
v
BD-VIDEO 24p OUT
RGB FIX
Use this setting when video images are not
correctly displayed on the monitor.
Setting
Values
Description
Memo:
OFF
Outputs in the resolution set by “HDMI
OUTPUT RESOLUTION”.
v
This is available when the “x.v.Color” setting is set to
“OFF”.
When the “x.v.Color” setting is set to “AUTO”, this setting
will be set to “AUTO” automatically.
Change this setting when no video image appears while
connected to a DVI device.
ON
Outputs 24p elements at 24p.
v
v
Memo:
v
24p playback is possible for commercially available BD-
Videos or BDMVs that are recorded in 24p. Content other
than BDMVs that is dubbed or recorded on this unit at 24p,
as well as 24p content on SD cards are played back at 60p
or 60i.
HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT
Setting
Values
Description
v
This is applicable for BD-ROM and DVD-Video titles.
This is available when connected to a 24p compatible
monitor.
OFF
Use this setting if you do not want to send
audio output from the HDMI cable.
ON
Use this setting to send audio output from
the HDMI cable.
v
v
Elements other than 24p ones are output at 60p (for NTSC)
or 50p (for PAL).
No video images will be output from the [VIDEO OUT], [S-
VIDEO OUT] and [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminals
when the output resolution from the [HDMI] terminal is at
1080/24p.
m
HDMI-CEC
For setting the HDMI-CEC operation from the connected
device.
Setting Values
Description
v
x.v.Color
OFF
ON
Disables HDMI-CEC.
Enables HDMI-CEC.
Setting
Values
Description
AUTO
Outputs x.v.Color information with HDMI
when video images that include x.v.Color
information are played back.
OFF
Does not output x.v.Color information with
HDMI when video images that include
x.v.Color information are played back.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings Menu
NETWORK SETTING (only for SR-HD1700)
Setting Menu List
(Continued)
COMPONENT OUTPUT
For setting the resolution of video output from the
[COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.
m
0'6914-ꢃ5'66+0)
+2ꢃ#&&4'55ꢃ5'66+0)
+2ꢃ#&&4'55
&*%2
京ꢂ京ꢂ京ꢂ京
京ꢂ京ꢂ京ꢂ京
京ꢂ京ꢂ京ꢂ京
ꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀ
57$0'6ꢃ/#5-
&'(#7.6ꢃ)#6'9#;
/#%ꢃ#&&4'55
%10(+4/
Setting Values
Description
480i (NTSC)
576i (PAL)
Sets output to “480i” or “576i”.
480p (NTSC)
576p (PAL)
Sets output to “480p” or “576p”.
5'.'%6
':+6
1-
5'6ꢃ72
4'6740
720p
1080i
Sets output to “720p”.
Sets output to “1080i”.
For specifying settings related to the LAN terminal.
m
IP ADDRESS SETTING
Memo:
v
When the resolution is set to “720p”, videos are output at
“1080i” other than those recorded at “720p” even though
“720p” is shown on the display.
For setting whether to obtain the IP address using “DHCP” or
to enter it manually using “MANUAL”.
Setting Values
Description
v
v
v
This unit does not support component output at “1080p”. To
output at “1080p”, do so via HDMI connection.
If “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” is set to “HDMI”, the unit will
output at “480i” or “576i” regardless of the current setting.
If “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” is set to “COMPONENT”, or
when an HDMI connection is used, DVD videos and BDMV
will be output at “480p” or “576p” even if “720p” or “1080i”
has been set.
DHCP
Obtains information from the DHCP
server each time the unit starts up.
MANUAL
For entering the IP address manually.
Memo:
v
Upon setting to DHCP, “IP ADDRESS”, “SUBNET MASK”,
and “DEFAULT GATEWAY” are grayed out, and input is
disabled.
v
The aspect ratio of video/S-video output changes according
to the component output setting. As such, there may be
cases where the aspect ratio of the video/S-video output is
different from the predefined setting of the content.
m
IP ADDRESS
For setting the IP address.
m
VIDEO INPUT SETTING
m
Choose a setting according to the video terminal to be
connected when an external analog input terminal is used.
SUBNET MASK
For setting the subnet mask.
Setting Values
Description
m
DEFAULT GATEWAY
VIDEO
Use this setting when connecting via the
video (BNC) terminal.
For setting the default gateway.
m
MAC ADDRESS
S-VIDEO
Use this setting when connecting via the
S-video (black) terminal.
Displays the MAC address.
m
CONFIRM
m
HDCP
Confirms the network settings that are currently displayed.
For setting the output of copyright-free contents to devices
that do not support HDCP.
Memo:
v
The settings are not applied until the confirmation items are
Setting
Values
Description
selected.
v
The default values when “IP ADDRESS SETTING” is set to
FIXED
Encrypts copyright-free contents during
playback.
“MANUAL” are as follows.
:
:
:
IP ADDRESS
192.168.100.100
255.255.255.0
AUTO
Does not encrypt copyright-free contents
during playback.
SUBNET MASK
DEFAULT GATEWAY
192.168.100.254
v
v
Memo:
Perform settings such that the same IP address is not used
within the network environment.
v
If “HDCP” is set to “AUTO” while a device incompatible with
HDCP is used, images may appear distorted. Operate as
follows if the images are distorted.
For details, check with the person in charge of setting the
network.
Press and hold the “0” button on the remote control for 5
seconds to set HDCP to “AUTO”.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Locking the Disc Tray
Turning on the Mode Lock
By turning on the lock for the disc tray, the tray cannot be
Turning on the mode lock disables all operations using the
buttons on the unit and remote control, except for “Play” and
“Record”.
opened or closed using the [M] button.
Memo:
v
When the [M] button is pressed while the disc tray lock is
Memo:
v
When a button that is disabled is pressed, a “LOCKED”
turned on, a “LOCKED” message will appear on the display
window of the unit for about three seconds.
message will appear on the display window of the unit for
three seconds.
Locking the disc tray
Turning on the mode lock
1
Press the [A] button on the unit to turn “Off”
the power
1
Press the [Z] button on the remote control for
five seconds or longer when in the “Normal
Recording”, “Stop”, or “Normal Playback” mode
2
Press and hold the [o] button on this unit, then
press the [M] button
A “LOCKED” message appears on the display window of
the unit, indicating that the disc tray is locked.
v
A “LOCKED” message appears on the display window of
the unit, indicating that the mode lock is turned on.
v
Press the “ ” button for
five seconds or longer
Unlocking the disc tray
1
Press the [A] button on the unit to turn “Off”
the power
2
Press and hold the [o] button on this unit, then
press the [M] button
An “UNLOCK” message appears on the display window of
the unit, indicating that the disc tray is unlocked.
v
Turning off the mode lock
1
Press the [Z] button on the remote control for
five seconds or longer when the mode lock is
turned on
An “UNLOCK” message appears on the display window of
the unit, indicating that the mode lock is turned off.
v
Last Function Memory
When the power plug is disconnected from unit or when
power failure occurs, your settings for the following functions
are kept in the memory. These settings will resume when the
unit is turned on again.
v
v
Deck selection: HDD/BD/SD
v
v
v
Kept for DVD-Video/AVCHD/BDMV and title/chapter only.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
External Control (only for
SR-HD1700)
This unit can be controlled using a PC, etc. by connecting them with an RS-232C or LAN cable.
RS-232C Specifications
v
:
:
:
:
:
:
Pin layout
Mode
Non-synchronous
Character length
Parity check
Start bit
8 bits
1
5
Odd
9
6
1
Stop bit
1
PIN No. Signal
Operation
Direction of signal
This unit h PC
Data rate
9600 bps
v
2
3
5
TxD
Transmit data
Bit configuration
Parity check
RxD Receive data
GND Signal grounding
This unit i PC
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Starting bit
Stopping bit
Memo:
v
When using the Serial Command Connector, the cable to be used should be an RS-232C interface cable (straight type, 3 m or
shorter).
v
v
During command transmission, a minimum interval of 50 ms is required between each command.
During command transmission, do not send the next command until the ACK (refer to “System Commands” (A page 100) ) or
v
The recommended maximum waiting time for the ACK or response for each command is as follows.
:
:
ACK
About 50 ms
Response
.
About 5 seconds
LAN Connection
Connect by specifying 1111 for the port.
During command transmission, a minimum interval of 100 ms is required between each command.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Command Table
Lower Order
Higher Order
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
Complete Error
Cassette
Out
Not
Target
Not
ACK
NAK
Ready
1
2
3
4
5
6
Play
Stop
Still
Clear
Sense
Title
Chapter
Sense
7
8
Chapter
Search
Title
Date
Clock
Search
Preset
Preset
9
Finalize
Cancel
Disc
TOP
MEDIA
NEXT
PREV
Setup
SET
UP
DOWN
RIGHT
FF
LEFT
REW
Next
Title
Prev
Remote
Disc
Erase
MENU
MANAGE CHAPTER CHAPTER
Title
Data
Finalization
A
B
Standby Standby
Eject
Fwd
Field
Step
Rev
On
Off
Field
Step
Fwd Shtl Rev Shtl
Select
Preset
Select
Sense
Date
Clock
Data
Data
Sense
Sense
C
D
Rec
Status
Sense
TC Data
Sense
CTL
JVC
Data
Sense
Status
Sense
E
F
Command
Target
Rec/Dub
Request
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
External Control (only for
SR-HD1700) (Continued)
Command
m
Operation Commands
Commands for operating functions such as PLAY and REC on the BLU-RAY DISC & HDD RECORDER
Command
Description
9E
Returns to the previous title. Functions like the
S button on the remote control.
3A
3F
Plays the selected deck.
9F
Issues the same codes as the wired remote
control via RS-232C.
Stops the selected deck. Resume will be
cleared when this is pressed while in the Stop
mode. Rec Request will be cleared.
A0
A1
A3
AB
Power On
4F
56
80
Switches the selected deck to the Still mode.
Clear: Clears the Error status.
Power Off
Eject: Opens/Closes tray. (BD Deck)
Searches the specified chapter and starts
playback from the beginning.
FF: Functions only during playback. Activates
forward search.
81
Searches the specified title under “ORIGINAL”
or in the “PLAY LIST” by its number and starts
playback from the beginning.
AC
AD
REW: Functions only during playback.
Activates reverse search.
Functions as a key for advancing (FWD) a
frame. When this command is received during
still mode, the unit advances the still picture
by one frame (or field) in the FWD direction.
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
For setting the date.
For setting the time.
Finalizes the disc. (BD Deck)
Cancels disc finalization. (BD Deck)
For erasing rewritable discs.
AE
B5
Functions as a key for reversing (REV) a
frame. When this command is received during
still mode, the unit reverses the still picture by
one frame (or field) in the REV direction.
Displays/Closes the top menu of a disc. (BD
Deck)
Fwd Shtl: Functions only during playback.
Activates forward search.
B5 h 30: STILL
94
95
96
97
Displays/Close the Media Manage Menu. (BD
Deck)
B5 h 31: FWD SLOW at the slowest speed
B5 h 32: FWD SLOW at a slow speed
B5 h 33: FWD SLOW at a fast speed
B5 h 34: FWD SLOW at the fastest speed
B5 h 35: 1x
B5 h 36: FWD SEARCH at the slowest speed
B5 h 37: FWD SEARCH at a slow speed
B5 h 38: FWD SEARCH at a fast speed
B5 h 39: FWD SEARCH at a faster speed
B5 h 3A: FWD SEARCH at the fastest speed
B5 h 3B: 1.3x
Advances to the next chapter. Functions like
the T button on the remote control.
Returns to the previous chapter. Functions
like the S button on the remote control.
Displays/Closes the Main Menu, Editing,
Library Database Navigation or Dubbing
screen.
97 h 30: Closes the screen.
97 h 31: Displays the Main Menu screen.
97 h 32: Displays the Library Database
Navigation screen.
B6
Rev Shtl: Functions only during playback.
Activates reverse search.
B6 h 30: STILL
97 h 35: Displays the Editing screen.
B6 h 31: REV SLOW at the slowest speed
B6 h 32: REV SLOW at a slow speed
B6 h 33: REV SLOW at a fast speed
B6 h 34: REV SLOW at the fastest speed
B6 h 36: REV SEARCH at the slowest speed
B6 h 37: REV SEARCH at a slow speed
B6 h 38: REV SEARCH at a fast speed
B6 h 39: REV SEARCH at a faster speed
B6 h 3A: REV SEARCH at the fastest speed
97 h 37: Displays the Dubbing screen.
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
Functions as a confirmation key.
Functions as an up key.
Functions as a down key.
Functions as a right key.
Functions as a left key.
Advances to the next title. Functions like the
T button on the remote control.
B8
For setting the input/output, recording mode,
audio language selection and subtitle
selection.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
CA
F0
Rec: Starts recording at the selected deck
when a Rec Request is received.
Command Target:
F0 h 34: For selecting HDD deck.
F0 h 38: For selecting BD deck.
F0 h 3C: For selecting SD deck.
FA
Rec/Dub Request: For issuing approval for
recording. This can be cleared using “Stop”.
80-8F
:
80 Chapter Search
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte
Chapter Search
Hundreds Tens
Ones
3*
ASCII codes (30 - 39) 3*
E.g. (012) 30
3*
31
32
:
E.g. When searching the 12th chapter.
:
81 Title Search under “ORIGINAL”
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte
Title Search (ORIGINAL) 30
Hundreds Tens
Ones
3*
ASCII codes (30 - 39)
E.g. (345)
30
30
3*
3*
33
34
35
:
E.g. When searching the 345th title, as indicated by the title number on the top right corner of the index, under “ORIGINAL”.
:
81 Title Search in “PLAY LIST”
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte
Title Search (PLAY LIST) 38
Hundreds Tens
Ones
3*
ASCII codes (30 - 39)
E.g. (028)
38
38
3*
3*
30
32
38
:
E.g. When searching the 28th play list, as indicated by the play list number on the top right corner of the index, in the “PLAY
LIST”.
:
8E Date Preset
1st Byte
2nd Byte
3rd Byte
4th Byte
5th Byte 6th Byte
Date Preset
Mth (Tens) Mth (Ones) Day (Tens) Day (Ones) Yr (Tens) Yr (Ones)
ASCII codes (30 - 39) 3*
E.g. (09.14.2012) 30
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
39
31
34
31
32
:
E.g. When setting the date to September 14 2012.
:
8F Clock Preset
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte
4th Byte
5th Byte
6th Byte
Clock Preset
Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones)
ASCII codes (30 - 39) 3*
E.g. (12:34:56) 31
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
32
33
34
35
36
:
E.g. When setting the time to 12 hrs 34 min and 56 sec.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
External Control (only for
SR-HD1700) (Continued)
9F
:
9F Remote Data
The remote control codes for controlling the wired remote controller via RS-232C is as shown in the following table. The codes
apply to all three HDD, BD and SD deck unless otherwise stated.
Code
01
03
06
07
0B
0C
0D
14
15
17
1A
1D
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
31
Items
INPUT SELECT
STOP
Remarks
80
CURSOR 0°
Moves the arrow in the
index list to the right. (I)
81
82
MENU
BD/DVD Deck only
CURSOR 90°
Moves the arrow in the
index list to the up. (J)
F.F/SPEED+
REW/SPEED-
POWER ON/OFF
PLAY
84
86
CURSOR 180°
CURSOR 270°
Moves the arrow in the
index list to the left. (H)
Moves the arrow in the
index list to the down. (K)
PAUSE/STILL
FWD SKIP
REV SKIP
AUDIO
87
8E
8F
90
OPEN/CLOSE
PROGRESSIVE
TOP MENU
MARK
BD/DVD Deck only
HDD/BD Deck only
DVD Deck only
HDD/DVD Deck only
Power Off
96
CM SKIP
Power On
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
REV FRAME
-SLOW D
TEN KEY 1
TEN KEY 2
TEN KEY 3
TEN KEY 4
TEN KEY 5
TEN KEY 6
TEN KEY 7
TEN KEY 8
TEN KEY 9
KEY Z
SHUTTLE-C
SHUTTLE-B
SHUTTLE-A
SHUTTLE-2
SHUTTLE-1
-SLOW B
-SLOW C
+SLOW C
+SLOW B
TEN KEY 0
KEY #
SHUTTLE +1
SHUTTLE +2
SHUTTLE +A
SHUTTLE +B
SHUTTLE +C
+SLOW D
REC MODE (XP/SP/LP/
EP…)
32
34
37
3C
3E
44
48
BD/DVD DECK
DUBBING
SET UP
ANGLE/LIVE CHECK
ANGLE (BD/DVD Deck
only)
LIVE CHECK (HDD/BD
Deck only)
OK/ENTER
ON SCREEN
HDD DECK
C4
SUBTITLE
DVD Deck only
MEDIA MANAGEMENT
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
CC REC
E0
E1
E2
NAVIGATION
D3
D4
D5
D7
D9
DA
DB
OPTION
L-1 Y/C INPUT SELECT HDD Deck only
RETURN
L-1 COMPOSITE INPUT HDD Deck only
SELECT
COLOR KEY BLUE
COLOR KEY RED
JOG -1/6
E3
E4
E5
PLAYBACK SETTING
DELETE
INFORMATION
CORRECT
JOG +1/6
JOG +1
ED
F2
F3
FWD FRAME
MODE LOCK
HDCP AUTO
DC INSTANT REPLAY
DD EDIT
DE
DF
COLOR KEY GREEN
COLOR KEY YELLOW
.
B8
:
B8 Input/Output Selection
1st Byte 2nd Byte
External input selection L-1 VIDEO
30
31
39
34
External input selection L-1 S-VIDEO 30
External input selection DV 30
:
B8 Recording Mode Selection
1st Byte 2nd Byte
XP 34
SP 34
LP 34
EP 34
DR 34
AF 34
AN 34
AL 34
AE 34
30
31
32
33
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
External Control (only for
SR-HD1700) (Continued)
Subtitle Selection
:
B8 Subtitle Selection
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
OFF
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FJ
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
LO
LT
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
76
77
SL
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
GERMAN
FRENCH
ITALIAN
SPANISH
DUTCH
SWEDISH
NORWEGIAN
FINNISH
DANISH
AA
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
AB
AF
AM
HR
HU
HY
IA
TK
TL
AR
AS
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
AY
AZ
IE
BA
IK
PS
PT
BE
IS
BG
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SI
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZH
ZU
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
SK
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Audio Language Selection
:
B8 Audio Language Selection
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
GERMAN
FRENCH
ITALIAN
SPANISH
DUTCH
SWEDISH
NORWEGIAN
FINNISH
DANISH
AA
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
EO
ET
EU
FA
FJ
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
LT
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
76
77
78
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
FO
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
AB
AF
AM
HR
HU
HY
IA
TK
TL
AR
AS
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
AY
AZ
IE
BA
IK
PS
PT
BE
IS
BG
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SI
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZH
ZU
CA
CO
CS
CY
DZ
SK
SL
EL
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
External Control (only for
SR-HD1700) (Continued)
Response Commands
RS-232C commands send from the deck.
Command
Description
01
02
Complete: Issued by the external recorder upon completing all specified operations by commands.
Error: Issued by the external recorder when receiving invalid commands in the context. In such cases, commands
that are sent will not be accepted. However, a return command will be issued but only to the Status Sense. To
clear the Error status, perform command 56 (Clear).
05
06
Not Target: Issued by the external recorder when specified operations by commands cannot be completed
properly.
Not Ready: This command is returned when the command request cannot be executed due to the following
conditions.
v
Power is OFF
v
Sending of control command is forbidden
0A
0B
03
ACK: A return command issued when a defined command is received.
NAK: A return command issued when an undefined or possibly nonexistent command is received.
Cassette Out: Issued upon completing the operation of opening and closing the tray when the HDD/DVD deck is
selected.
System Commands
Commands for acquiring information such as deck status.
Command
Description
60
61
B9
Chapter Sense: For acquiring the current chapter number. (*)
Title/Track Sense: For acquiring the current title number under “ORIGINAL” or in the “PLAY LIST”. (*)
Select Sense: For acquiring the status of the inputs, outputs, recording mode, audio language selection and
subtitle selection. (*)
BE
BF
D7
D8
Date Sense: For acquiring the currently configured year, month and day. (*)
Time Sense: For acquiring the currently configured hour, minute and second. (*)
Status Sense: For acquiring the deck information. (*)
TC Data Sense: For acquiring the total remaining time in the current recording mode when there is a media in the
selected deck. (*)
D9
DD
FB
CTL Data Sense: For acquiring the lapse counter when there is a media in the selected deck. (*)
JVC Status Sense: Returns data from the unit. (*)
VTR Ind: A command for checking whether the connected device is the external recorder.
:
Sense
v
Chapter Sense
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte
Chapter Sense Hundreds Tens
Ones
3*
60
3*
3*
E.g. (012)
30
31
32
:
E.g. When the current chapter is the 12th chapter.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
v
Title/Track Sense under “ORIGINAL”
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte
Title/Track Sense (ORIGINAL) 30
Hundreds Tens
Ones
3*
61
30
30
3*
3*
E.g. (345)
33
34
35
:
E.g. When the current title under “ORIGINAL” is the 345th title.
v
Title/Track Sense in “PLAY LIST”
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte
Title/Track Sense (PLAY LIST) 38
Hundreds Tens
Ones
3*
61
38
38
3*
3*
E.g. (028)
30
32
38
:
E.g. When the current title under “PLAY LIST” is the 28th title.
v
Select Sense
1st Byte
2nd Byte
3rd Byte
4th Byte
5th Byte
Select Sense
B9
External input
selection
Output selection Recording mode
selection
Audio language
selection
Subtitle selection
3*
3*
**
**
**
E.g. (3930311213) 39
30
31
12
13
:
E.g. When the selection status of the video deck is as follows:
External input selection h L-1 S-VIDEO
Output selection h Common output (Frame is fixed at 0.)
Recording mode selection h SP
Audio language selection h ENGLISH
Subtitle selection h GERMAN
When the current status cannot be acquired, the value is fixed as “-” (0x2D).
v
Date Data Sense
For acquiring the currently configured year, month and day in ASCII codes.
1st Byte
2nd Byte
3rd Byte
4th Byte
5th Byte 6th Byte
Date Sense
BE
Mth (Tens) Mth (Ones) Day (Tens) Day (Ones) Yr (Tens) Yr (Ones)
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
E.g. (09.14.2012) 30
39
31
34
31
32
When the current date is not set, the value is fixed as “-” (0x2D).
v
Time Data Sense
For acquiring the currently configured hour, minute and second in ASCII codes.
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte
6th Byte
Time Sense
BF
Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones)
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
E.g. (12:34:56) 31
32
33
34
35
36
When the current time is not set, the value is fixed as “-” (0x2D).
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
External Control (only for
SR-HD1700) (Continued)
v
Status Data Sense
For acquiring the remaining time in the current recording mode in hours, minutes and seconds for HDD/BD/SD.
D7
1st Byte
1st Byte
1st Byte
2nd Byte
3rd Byte
4th Byte
5th Byte
STATUS
SENSE
HDD
BD
SD
HDD/BD/SD
Video EE
HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD
bit7
1 (Fixed)
1 (Fixed)
1 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
During PLAY During PAUSE (Set
to 1 simultaneously
with “During PLAY” in
STILL mode. Set to 1
simultaneously with
“During REC” in
record pause mode.)
bit6
bit5
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
1 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
1 (Fixed)
1 (Fixed)
Audio EE
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
During Reverse
Shuttle Search
(Excluding STILL)
bit4
bit3
Record
Forbidden
Record
Forbidden
1 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
During
STOP
During Forward
Shuttle Search
(Excluding STILL)
Disc Not
Inserted
Disc Not
Inserted
Disc Not
Inserted
Occurrence of 0 (Fixed)
abnormality in
VTR
During
Refer to the SEARCH
SPEED table.
STANDBY
(Unit Power
Off)
bit2
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
During
Repeat
Playback
(Including
PAUSE)
0 (Fixed)
Refer to the SEARCH
SPEED table.
bit1
bit0
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
During REC
0 (Fixed)
Refer to the SEARCH
SPEED table.
RS-232C
command
RS-232C
command
RS-232C
command
0 (Fixed)
Refer to the SEARCH
SPEED table.
error status. error status. error status.
Clear using
56 (Clear).
Clear using
56 (Clear).
Clear using
56 (Clear).
v
TC Data Sense
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte
4th Byte
5th Byte
6th Byte
7th Byte
8th Byte
TC Data Sense Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones) Frame (Tens) Frame (Ones)
D8
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
E.g. (01:23:45) 30
31
32
33
34
35
30
30
:
E.g. When remaining time for the current recording mode of the selected deck is 1 hr 23 min 45 sec.
Frame is fixed as 0.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
v
SEARCH SPEED
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
STILL
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
x1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
x1.3
SLOW1
SLOW2
SLOW3
SLOW4
SEARCH1
SEARCH2
SEARCH3
SEARCH4
SEARCH5
v
CTL Data Sense
For acquiring lapse counter of selected deck in hours, minutes and seconds.
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte
CTL Data Sense Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones) Frame (Tens) Frame (Ones)
6th Byte
7th Byte
8th Byte
D9
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
3*
E.g. (01:23:45)
30
31
32
33
34
35
30
30
:
E.g. When time lapse counter is 1 hr 23 min 45 sec.
Frame is fixed as 0.
v
JVC Status Sense
1st Byte
2nd Byte
3rd Byte
4th Byte
HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD
HDD/BD/SD
1 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
HDD/BD/SD
1 (Fixed)
1 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
bit7 1 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
1 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
bit6 0 (Fixed)
bit5 0 (Fixed)
bit4 0 (Fixed)
bit3 0 (Fixed)
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)
During dubbing (Including
PAUSE)
bit2 0 (Fixed)
bit1 0 (Fixed)
bit0 1 (Fixed)
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
0 (Fixed)
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. During dubbing (Including
PAUSE)
v
DISC TYPE
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
DVD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
CD
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
BD-ROM
BD-R
DVD-RW
DVD+R
DVD+RW
BD-RE
No disc
Unknown
When SD deck is selected, the values are fixed as bit3:0, bit2:0, bit1:1 and bit0:0.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Language Code List
Code
AA
Language
Code
HI
Language
Code
OS
PA
FA
Language
Afar
Hindi
Ossetian
Panjabi
Persian
Pali
AB
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Akan
HO
HU
IG
Hiri Motu
Hungarian
Igbo
AF
AK
PI
SQ
AM
AR
AN
HY
AS
Albanian
Amharic
Arabic
IS
Icelandic
Ido
PL
Polish
IO
PT
Portuguese
Pashto
II
Sichuan Yi
Inuktitut
Interlingue
PS
QU
RM
RO
Aragonese
Armenian
Assamese
IU
Quechua
IE
Rhaeto-Romance
Romanian
IA
Interlingua (International
Auxiliary language Association)
AV
AE
AY
AZ
BA
BM
EU
BE
BN
BH
BI
Avar
ID
IK
Indonesian
Inupiak
RN
RU
SG
SA
SR
HR
SI
Kirundi
Avestan
Aymara
Russian
Sango
IT
Italian
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
JV
JA
KL
KN
KS
KR
KK
KM
KI
Javanese
Japanese
Kalaallisut
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kanuri
Sanskrit
Serbia
Bambara
Basque
Croatian
Sinhala
Slovak
Belarusian
Bengali
SK
SL
Slovenian
Northern Sami
Samoan
Shona
Bihari
Kazakh
SE
SM
SN
SD
SO
ST
ES
SC
SS
SU
SW
SV
TY
TA
TT
Bislama
Bosnian
Breton
Khmer
BS
BR
BG
MY
CA
CH
CE
ZH
CU
CV
KW
CO
CR
CS
DA
Kikuyu
RW
KY
KV
KG
KO
KJ
KU
LO
LA
LV
LI
Kinyarwanda
Kirghiz
Sindhi
Bulgarian
Burmese
Catalan, Valencian
Chamorro
Chechen
Chinese
Church Slavic
Chuvash
Cornish
Somali
Komi
Southern Sotho
Spanish
Sardinian
Swati
Kongo
Korean
Kwanyama
Kurukh
Sundanese
Swahili
Lao
Latin
Swedish
Tahitian
Tamil
Latvian
Corsican
Cree
Limburgish
Lingala
LN
LT
LB
Tatar
Czech
Lithuanian
Luxembourgish
TE
TG
Telugu
Danish
Tajik
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
DV
NL
DZ
EN
EO
ET
EE
FO
FJ
Divehi
LU
LG
MK
MH
ML
MI
Luba-Katanga
Ganda
TL
TH
BO
TI
Tagalog
Thai
Dutch
Dzongkha
English
Esperanto
Estonian
Ewe
Macedonian
Marshallese
Malayalam
Māori
Tibetan
Tigrinya
Tongan
Tswana
Tsonga
Turkmen
Turkish
Twi
TO
TN
TS
TK
TR
TW
UG
UK
UR
UZ
VE
VI
MR
MS
MG
MT
MO
MN
NA
NV
NR
ND
NG
NE
NN
NB
NO
NY
OC
OJ
Marathi
Faroese
Fijian
Malay
Malagasy
Maltese
FI
Finnish
French
FR
FY
FF
KA
DE
GD
GA
GL
GV
EL
GN
GU
HT
HA
HE
HZ
Moldavian
Mongolian
Nauruan
Uighur
Ukrainian
Urdu
Western Frisian
Fulah
Georgian
German
Scottish Gaelic
Irish
Navajo
Uzbek
South Ndebele
North Ndebele
Ndonga
Venda
Vietnamese
Volapük
Welsh
VO
CY
WA
WO
XH
YI
Galician
Manx
Nepali
Norwegian Nynorsk
Norwegian Bokmål
Norwegian
Chichewa
Occitan
Walloon
Wolof
Greek
Guaraní
Gujarati
Haitian
Xhosa
Yiddish
Yoruba
Zhuang
Zulu
YO
ZA
ZU
Hausa
Ojibwa
Hebrew
Herero
OR
OM
Oriya
Oromo
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Country Code List
Code
AD
AE
AF
Country Name
Code
GM
GN
Country Name
Code
NU
NZ
Country Name
Andorra
Gambia
Guinea
Niue
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
New Zealand
Oman
GP
Guadeloupe
Equatorial Guinea
Greece
OM
PA
AG
AI
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
GQ
GR
Panama
Peru
PE
AL
Albania
GS
South Georgia and South Sandwich
Islands
PF
Polynesia
AM
AN
AO
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
BG
BH
BI
Armenia
GT
GU
GW
GY
HK
HM
HN
HR
HT
HU
ID
Guatemala
PG
PH
PK
PL
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Guam
Guinea-Bissau
Pakistan
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
Austria
Guyana
Poland
Hong Kong
PM
PN
PR
PT
PW
PY
QA
RE
RO
RU
RW
SA
SB
SC
SD
SE
SG
SH
SI
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
Pitcairn Islands
Puerto Rico
Portugal
Heard and McDonald Islands
Honduras
Australia
Croatia
Aruba
Haiti
Palau
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Hungary
Paraguay
Indonesia
Qatar
IE
Ireland
Reunon Island
Romania
IL
Israel
IN
India
Russian Federation
Rwanda
Burkina Faso
Bulgaria
IO
British Indian Ocean Territory
IQ
Iraq
Saudi Arabia
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Bahrain
IR
Iran
Burundi
IS
Iceland
BJ
Benin
IT
Italy
Sudan
BM
BN
BO
BR
BS
BT
BV
BW
BY
BZ
Bermuda
Brunei
JM
JO
JP
KE
KG
KH
KI
Jamaica
Jordan
Sweden
Singapore
Bolivia
Japan
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Brazil
Kenya
Bahamas
Bhutan
Kyrgyzstan
Cambodia
Kiribati
SJ
Svalbard and Jan Mayen Islands
Slovakia
SK
SL
Bouvet Island
Botswana
Belarus
Sierra Leone
San Marino
Senegal
KM
KN
KP
Comoros
Saint Kitts and Nevis
SM
SN
Belize
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic SO
of
Somalia
CA
CC
CF
CG
CH
CI
Canada
KR
KW
KY
KZ
LA
LB
Korea, Republic of
Kuwait
SR
ST
SV
SY
SZ
TC
Suriname
Cocos Islands
Central African Republic
Congo, Republic of
Switzerland
Sao Tome and Principe
El Salvador
Cayman Islands
Kazakhstan
Laos
Syria
Swaziland
Cote d’Ivoire
Lebanon
Turks and Caicos Islands
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CR
CU
CV
CX
CY
CZ
DE
DJ
Cook Islands
Chile
LC
Saint Lucia
Liechtenstein
Sri Lanka
Liberia
TD
TF
Chad
LI
French Southern Territories
Togo
Cameroon
LK
TG
TH
TJ
China
LR
Thailand
Colombia
LS
Lesotho
Tajikistan
Costa Rica
Cuba
LT
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Latvia
TK
TM
TN
TO
TP
TR
TT
Tokelau
LU
Turkmenistan
Tunisia
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
LV
LY
Libya
Tonga
MA
MC
MD
MG
MH
ML
MM
MN
MO
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
MW
MX
MY
MZ
NA
NC
NE
NF
Morocco
East Timor
Czech Republic
Germany
Monaco
Turkey
Moldova
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
Djibouti
Madagascar
Marshall Islands
Mali
TV
TW
TZ
DK
DM
DO
DZ
EC
EE
EG
EH
ER
ES
ET
FI
Denmark
Taiwan
Dominica, Commonwealth of
Dominican Republic
Algeria
Tanzania
Myanmar
Mongolia
Macau
UA
UG
UM
US
UY
UZ
VA
VC
VE
VG
VI
Ukraine
Uganda
Ecuador
Minor Outlying Islands
United States
Uruguay
Estonia
Northern Mariana Islands
Martinique
Mauritania
Montserrat
Malta
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Uzbekistan
Vatican
Spain
Saint Vincent and the Grenadine
Venezuela
Ethiopia
Mauritius
Maldives
Finland
British Virgin Islands
Virgin Islands of the United States
Vietnam
FJ
Fiji
Malawi
FK
FM
FO
FR
FX
GA
GB
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
Micronesia (Federated States of)
Faroe Islands
France
Mexico
VN
VU
WF
WS
YE
YT
YU
Malaysia
Vanuatu
Mozambique
Namibia
Wallis and Futuna
Samoa
France, Metropolitan
Gabon
New Caledonia
Niger
Yemen
Mayotte
United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland
Norfolk Island
Yugoslavia
GD
GE
GF
GH
GI
Grenada
Georgia
NG
NI
Nigeria
ZA
ZM
ZR
ZW
South Africa
Zambia
Nicaragua
Netherlands
Norway
Nepal
French Guiana
Ghana
NL
NO
NP
NR
Zaire
Zimbabwe
Gibraltar
GL
Greenland
Nauru
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Using the HDMI Consumer
Electronics Control (HDMI
CEC)
Creating a Seamless BD
When titles are imported into the HDD in the HD quality from
a video camera, or when edited titles (e.g., after applying
scene delete) are dubbed to a disc, seamless playback may
not be possible at the joints of scenes. In this case, perform
dubbing after executing “SEAMLESS” under the “MODE
CHANGE” setting menu.
HDMI Consumer Electronics Control
v
By using an HDMI cable to connect this unit with a TV that
supports the HDMI CEC standard, this unit and the TV can
be linked and operated together.
Creating a seamless BD that uses “MODE
CONVERSION” (seamless conversion,
recording mode conversion)
v
HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) is an industrial
standard that allows HDMI devices to be linked and
operated among each other by connecting them with an
HDMI cable.
v
Procedures to create a seamless BDMV
File to import
If you do not want to
perform scene delete/
chapter delete
If you want to
perform scene
delete/chapter
delete
HDMI Consumer Electronics Control
operations
AVCHD
Recording mode
conversion
-
v
MOV*/MXF*
Conversion not required Seamless
conversion
Perform the following operations when this unit is turned
on, and the TV will switch automatically to the HDMI input
that this unit is connected to.
SD-VIDEO(HD)* Recording mode
HDV
Recording mode
conversion after
seamless conversion
conversion after
seamless conversion
v
Playback from HDD, BD/DVD or SD CARD
v
Press the [NAVIGATION] or [SET UP] button
:
:
SD-VIDEO(HD)* SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 TS)
MOV*
v
Turning off the power for the TV will also turn the power off
for this unit automatically.
If HDD, BD/DVD or SD CARD is being used for dubbing,
the power will be turned off after dubbing finishes.
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode
and HQ mode using the JVC ProHD
MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM series
:
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode
and HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
Using HDMI Consumer Electronics Control
(activating the function)
v
Procedures to create a seamless BDAV
1
File to import
If you do not want to
perform scene delete/
chapter delete
If you want to
perform scene
delete/chapter
delete
Connect this unit to a TV that is HDMI CEC
compatible using an HDMI cable
2
Change the setting of “HDMI-CEC” to “ON”
Check the monitor (TV) setting if the HDMI CEC function
does not work.
v
AVCHD
Conversion not required
-
MOV*/MXF*
Conversion not required Seamless
conversion
Memo:
v
If you are not using the HDMI CEC function (deactivating),
change the setting of “HDMI-CEC” to “OFF”.
SD-VIDEO(HD)* Seamless conversion
HDV
Seamless
conversion
Note:
:
:
SD-VIDEO(HD)* SD-VIDEO (JVC Everio MPEG2 TS)
v
The HDMI CEC function cannot be used if a TV that is not
MOV*
MOV format files recorded in the SP mode
and HQ mode using the JVC ProHD
MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY-HM series
compatible with HDMI CEC has been connected.
v
If an HDMI cable is not used for connecting, the HDMI CEC
function will not be usable.
:
MXF*
MXF format files recorded in the SP mode
and HQ mode using JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM650
Memo:
v
During dubbing to BDMV, the recording mode cannot be
specified.
v
v
v
Do not perform recording mode conversion before
seamless conversion. Otherwise, seamless conversion
cannot be performed.
If scene delete or chapter delete is applied to a title, it
cannot be dubbed to a BDMV disc without performing
seamless conversion.
For titles that are imported into the HDD in the SD picture
quality, you can create a seamless DVD by setting
“SEAMLESS PLAYBACK” under the “Setting Menu List” to
“ON”, followed by performing re-encode dubbing.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Troubleshooting
Problem
Symptom
Action
Reference
Page
Power does not turn on The “HELLO” message remains
up.
Press the [RESET] button on the front
displayed, and the unit does not start panel.
If it does not start up, stop using this unit,
unplug the plug from the outlet, and bring it
to the dealer or Service Center.
The cooling fan motor is “FAN LOCKED” is displayed on the
The cooling fan motor is spoiled. Stop
using the unit, remove the power plug from
the outlet, and consult the dealer or
Service Center.
-
not working
display window of this unit.
Power turns off
automatically
The “AUTO POWER (OFF)” setting is Change the “AUTO POWER (OFF)”
set to “2 HOURS” or “6 HOURS”. setting of “SETUP” to “OFF”.
The temperature of this unit has rose, Place this unit in an area with ventilation if
-
and operation has ceased for safety
purposes.
possible, and wait approximately 30
minutes for it to cool down.
The power turns on
automatically
The “HDMI-CEC” setting is set to
“ON”.
Change the “HDMI-CEC” setting of
“CONNECTION” to “OFF”.
Input cannot be
switched
i.LINK connection is currently being
established.
Cancel importing, or wait until the
connection ends.
There are no video
images on the monitor
Monitor only supports RGB input.
Set “HDMI --> DVI COLOR” in the setting
menu to “RGB FIX”.
“HDCP ERROR” is displayed.
Use a monitor that supports HDCP.
-
Video images may be distorted during This is not a malfunction. Change the
reencoding/dubbing when the monitor “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” to a value
(TV) is connected to this unit using an other than “1080p” (e.g., 1080i) if you find
HDMI cable, or when the screen
resolution is set to “1080p”.
it annoying.
Screen is distorted
Video images may be distorted during This is not a malfunction. Change the
reencoding/dubbing when the monitor “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” to a value
(TV) is connected to this unit using an other than “1080p” (e.g., 1080i) if you find
HDMI cable, or when the screen
resolution is set to “1080p”.
it annoying.
There is no audio sound The “HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT” setting Change the “HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT”
is set to “OFF”.
setting of “CONNECTION” to “ON”.
The amplifier does not support
“BITSTREAM” output.
Use an amplifier that supports bitstream
output.
Dubbing cannot be
performed
The title to be dubbed is copyright
protected.
Titles that are copyright-protected cannot
be dubbed. Select a title that is not
copyright-protected.
A finalized disc has been inserted.
The disc is not formatted.
Insert a disc that has not been finalized.
Format the disc.
-
The SD card is write-protected.
protect lock.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Troubleshooting
(Continued)
Problem
Symptom
Action
Reference
Page
v
v
Dubbing cannot be
performed
“NEXT” cannot be selected when a title
that cannot be dubbed is chosen.
Dubbing may start when you return to
recording mode selection to change the
recording mode.
Some titles cannot be dubbed
depending on their recording mode and
format.
You can distinguish titles that cannot be
dubbed by selecting the titles one by
one.
v
“NEXT” cannot be selected due to
insufficient disc space.
Dubbing may start when you return to
recording mode selection to change the
recording mode.
v
v
Dubbing may start after reducing the
number of titles to be dubbed.
Dubbing may start by switching to a
dual-layer disc.
“NEXT” cannot be selected as a dubbing Select at least one content for dubbing.
title list is not created.
High-speed dubbing Dubbing cannot be performed and
cannot be performed “SOME TITLES CANNOT BE DUBBED” settings menu to “4:3” before recording or
Set “HIGH-SPEED DUBBING” in the
for EP mode titles
is displayed when trying to perform high- importing in the EP mode.
speed dubbing of a EP mode title to a
DVD-VIDEO mode disc.
Data cannot be
imported
The title to be dubbed is copyright
protected.
Titles that are copyright-protected cannot
be dubbed. Select a title that is not
copyright-protected.
The number of titles stored in the HDD
has reached the maximum amount.
Delete or combine the titles in the HDD to
reduce the amount of titles to less than
500.
The remaining space on the HDD is
running out.
remaining space.
v
“START” cannot be selected when a title
that cannot be dubbed is chosen.
When importing data from a BD/DVD to
the HDD, selection of “START” may be
enabled after you return to recording
mode selection to change the recording
mode.
Some titles cannot be dubbed
depending on their recording mode and
format.
v
You can distinguish titles that cannot be
dubbed by selecting the titles one by
one.
“START” cannot be selected due to
insufficient HDD space or upon reaching Alternatively, format the HDD.
the maximum number of titles in the
HDD.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
“START” cannot be selected as a
dubbing title list is not created.
Select at least one content for dubbing.
The title/group name Protection of the title/group name is
cannot be changed
turned on.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Problem
Symptom
Action
Reference
Page
The remote control unit
does not work
The battery of the remote control unit Change new batteries for the remote
has run out.
control.
The remote control code of this unit
and the remote control unit are
different from each other.
for the remote control to the same number
used by this unit.
A “LOCKED” message appears on
the display window of the unit.
Disable the “mode lock” setting.
-
The disc cannot be
ejected
A “LOCKED” message appears on
the display window of the unit.
Disable the “tray lock” setting.
The “READING” message does not
disappear from the unit’s display
window, and the disc tray does not
open when the [ M ] button is
pressed.
Pressing the [ M ] button at the front of the
unit for five seconds or longer opens the
disc tray. To close the disc tray after
removing the disc, press the [ A ] button,
and wait until the tray is closed and power
is turned off.
(If the disc tray does not open after
pressing the [ M ] button for five seconds
or longer, consult our authorized dealer.)
The disc cannot be
played
A disc that cannot be played on this
unit is inserted.
Confirm that the disc is playable on this
unit.
different from that of this unit.
on this unit.
An unfinalized DVD disc that is
recorded using another device is
inserted.
Use that device to finalize the disc.
-
-
Output is at “480i” (for
NTSC) or “576i” (for
PAL) regardless of the
component output
The component output setting may
be changed to “480i” (for NTSC) or
“576i” (for PAL) after viewing at a
setting of 1080/24p using an HDMI
connection.
Turn the power off, and turn it on again.
resolution setting
The aspect ratios of the
HDMI output and
component output are
different
When two monitors are connected
respectively to the HDMI output and
component output terminals of this
unit, the screen aspect ratio of the
component output may not be
appropriate if “VIDEO PRIORITY
MODE” is set to “HDMI”.
When two monitors are connected
simultaneously, users are recommended
to set “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” to
“COMPONENT”.
Mode Conversion
cannot be performed
although “SEAMLESS”
Turning off the power may not start
mode conversion even if “AFTER
POWER OFF” in “SEAMLESS” is set
Cancel mode conversion.
in the “MODE CHANGE” and mode conversion is interrupted
menu is set to “AFTER
POWER OFF” and the
power is turned off.
by the power being turned on while
mode conversion is in progress.
.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Frequently Asked
Questions on Dubbing
Problem
Symptom
Cause
Action
Reference
Page
v
v
v
Unable to dub “SOME TITLES
Titles that cannot be dubbed
at high speed are selected
after “HIGH-SPEED
DUBBING” has been
selected at the recording
mode selection.
Select a setting other than “HIGH-
SPEED DUBBING” at the recording
mode selection.
Remove titles that cannot be
dubbed at high speed from the
dubbing title list.
from HDD
CANNOT BE
DUBBED” is
displayed.
v
v
v
v
Titles that are recorded using
“XP/SP/LP/EP” mode are
selected after “BDAV” has
been selected as the disc
format.
Change the disc format to DVD-VR
or DVD-Video.
For BDAV format, change the
recording mode to “XP/SP/LP/EP”.
Remove titles that cannot be
dubbed from the dubbing title list.
v
v
v
The total recording time of
the titles selected in the
dubbing title list has
exceeded the recordable
capacity of the disc.
Select other recording mode at the
recording mode selection.
Reselect the titles in the dubbing
title list such that the total recording
time can fit within the recordable
capacity of the disc.
v
v
Change to a dual-layer disc.
v
The total number of the
selected titles in the dubbing
title list and the recorded
titles on the media to dub to
has exceeded the limit.
Reselect the titles in the dubbing
title list such that the total number of
titles is within the allowable quantity
of the media to dub to.
v
v
The total number of chapters
of the selected titles in the
dubbing title list and the
recorded titles on the media
to dub to has exceeded the
limit.
Reselect the titles in the dubbing
title list such that the total number of
chapters is within the allowable
quantity of the media to dub to.
v
v
v
Titles that are copyright-
protected are selected.
Titles that are copyright-protected
cannot be dubbed.
v
v
An attempt has been made
to dub titles with MPEG
audio using the BDMV
format.
Change the disc format to BDAV.
Perform mode conversion of the
title.
v
v
An attempt has been made
to dub EP mode titles,
recorded with “VIDEO MODE
RECORDING ASPECT”
under “HIGH-SPEED
DUBBING” in the settings
menu set to a setting other
than “4:3”, to a DVD-Video
format disc.
To dub EP mode titles, use titles
that are recorded or imported with
“VIDEO MODE RECORDING
ASPECT” under “HIGH-SPEED
DUBBING” in the settings menu set
to “4:3”.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Memo:
When “SOME TITLES CANNOT BE DUBBED” appears after selecting high-speed dubbing, check the followings.
v
Titles that are copyright-protected cannot be dubbed.
v
Titles that are recorded in a recording mode that does not support high-speed dubbing cannot be dubbed.
(When performing high-speed dubbing in DVD-Video format, titles recorded in a mode such as AF mode cannot be dubbed.)
v
v
Content for which editing, such as deleting of scene, has been performed cannot be dubbed at high speed using BDMV
format.
(High-speed dubbing is made possible by performing mode conversion.)
There is a limit to the number of titles and chapters recordable depending on the type of disc and format used.
:
:
:
:
DVD-Video
DVD-VR
BDAV
Maximum 99 titles and 999 chapters (maximum 99 chapters per title)
Maximum 99 titles and 999 chapters (maximum 999 chapters per title)
Maximum 200 titles and 999 chapters (maximum 100 chapters per title)
Maximum 99 titles and 99 x 999 chapters
BDMV
Problem
Symptom
“SOME TITLES
Cause
Action
Reference
Page
v
v
v
Unable to
import to HDD CANNOT BE
DUBBED” is
HDD memory is insufficient.
Delete unwanted titles recorded in
the HDD.
v
v
displayed.
The amount of titles in the
HDD has reached the
maximum amount.
Delete unwanted titles recorded in
the HDD.
A maximum of 499 titles are
recordable to the HDD.
v
v
Titles that are copyright-
protected are selected.
Titles that are copyright-protected
cannot be imported.
.
Remarks
m
VIDEO output
When HD-quality contents are output from the [VIDEO] terminal, the resolution will deteriorate.
m
Image quality
When the video is down converted during playback, the image quality may be lowered.
Noise may appear at the bottom of the screen if the video is dubbed from DVC_pro.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
Component video output:
Specifications
:
:
:
Y
1.0 V(p-p), 75 K
CB/CR, PB/PR
0.7 V(p-p), 75 K
m
General
LAN
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Power requirement
SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US:
AC 120 V H, 60 Hz
SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU/SR-HD1700ER/
SR-HD1700AG:
AC 220 V - 240 V H, 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Memo:
v
Corresponding to copy protection
Only SR-HD1700 is equipped with the LAN terminal.
v
Digital audio output:
Optical
:
PCM, AAC, Dolby Digital and DTS
Power consumption
HDMI output
19-pin type A
:
:
Power on
Power off
36 W
(Deep Color, x.v.Color, Ver1.3)
USB terminal
0.5 W
Laser specification
For CD
USB2.0
m
:
:
Wavelength
Output
779 nm to 789 nm
SD memory card
SD, SDHC
No hazardous radiation is emitted with
the safety protection.
m
HDD Deck
For DVD
Wavelength
Output
500 GB (SR-HD1700)
320 GB (SR-HD1350)
Recording compression system
Video
:
:
656 nm to 663 nm
No hazardous radiation is emitted with
the safety protection.
For BD
MPEG2 (VBR)
H.264/AVC
Audio
Dolby Digital (2 ch)
Linear PCM (2ch, XP mode only)
MPEG1 Audio Layer2 (recorded in 2ch)
:
:
Wavelength
Output
400 nm to 410 nm
No hazardous radiation is emitted with
the safety protection.
Temperature
Operating
:
:
:
:
5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F)
-20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
Horizontal only
m
BD/DVD Deck
Recording compression system
Video
Storage
Operating position
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
435 mm x 70 mm x 351 mm
(17-1/10" x 2-6/8" x 13-13/16")
MPEG2 (CBR/VBR)
H.264/AVC
Audio
:
Weight
4.9 kg (10.8 lbs)
Dolby Digital (2 ch)
Linear PCM (2ch, XP mode only)
MPEG1 Audio Layer2 (recorded in 2ch)
Region code
m
Input/Output
:
:
:
:
Video input
Video output
Audio input
Audio output
S-video input
Y
1.0 V(p-p), 75 K (BNC)
1.0 V(p-p), 75 K (BNC)
:
:
BD
Region *1
*2
Max 2 Vrms / 10 kK (pin jack)
2 Vrms / 10 kK terminated (pin jack)
DVD
:
*1 SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US/SR-HD1700AG: A,
SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU: B, SR-HD1700ER: C
:
:
1.0 V(p-p), 75 K
:
*2 SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US: 1,
SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU: 2, SR-HD1700AG: 3,
SR-HD1700ER: 5
C
SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US:
0.3 V(p-p), 75 K
SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU/
SR-HD1700ER/SR-HD1700AG:
0.286 V(p-p), 75 K
m
ACCESSORIES
Provided accessories
v
AC power cord (SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US/
S-video output
SR-HD1700ER/SR-HD1700AG)
AC power cord x 2 (for continental Europe, U.K.)
(SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU)
Infrared remote control unit
“AA” battery x 2
CD-ROM
:
:
Y
C
1.0 V(p-p), 75 K
v
SR-HD1700US/SR-HD1350US:
0.3 V(p-p), 75 K
SR-HD1700EU/SR-HD1350EU/
SR-HD1700ER/SR-HD1700AG:
0.286 V(p-p), 75 K
v
v
v
:
:
:
DV
4-pin for HDV/DV IN
φ3.5 mm Jack
D-SUB 9-PIN
Design and specifications subject to change without
notice.
Remote Input
Serial Command
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Using External Inputs
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● SDI input is mentioned in the instruction manual; however,
there is no SDI input on this unit.
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
Notes on Direct Recording to DVD Discs
Remarques sur l’enregistrement direct vers les
disques DVD
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Direct recording in DVD-Video format to a single-sided, dual
layer DVD-R disc is not allowed.
● L’enregistrement direct au format DVD-Vidéo sur un DVD-R
simple face à double couche n’est pas autorisé.
Direct recording in DVD-Video format to a single-sided, single
layer DVD-R disc is allowed.
L’enregistrement direct au format DVD-Vidéo sur un DVD-R
simple face à simple couche est autorisé.
● For direct recording in DVD-Video format, chapters that are
assigned during recording (through pause operation,
pressing of Mark key or Auto Marking function) will not be
valid while the disc is finalized.
● Pour l’enregistrement direct au format DVD-Vidéo, les
chapitres qui sont attribués pendant l’enregistrement (par une
opération de pause, la pression sur la touche de marquage,
ou la fonction de marquage automatique) ne seront pas
valides lorsque le disque est finalisé.
After finalization, chapters are assigned automatically at
intervals of 5 to 6 minutes.
● For direct recording in BDMV format, titles are divided at the
point where recording is paused or canceled.
Après la finalisation, les chapitres sont attribués
automatiquement à des intervalles de 5 à 6 minutes.
●
Pour l’enregistrement direct au format BDMV, les titres sont
divisés à l’endroit où l’enregistrement est suspendu ou annulé.
MOV Files Recorded on JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM850/GY-HM890
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
Fichiers MOV enregistrés sur la JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM850/GY-HM890
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● MOV files that are recorded on the SD card with “Recording in
DCIM Folder” on GY-HM850/GY-HM890 set to “ON” cannot
be imported from the USB terminal or SD card slot of this unit.
To import using this unit, set “Recording in DCIM Folder” on
GY-HM850/GY-HM890 to “OFF” before recording.
For details on how to set “Recording in DCIM Folder” on
GY-HM850/GY-HM890, refer to the instruction manual of
GY-HM850/GY-HM890.
●
Les fichiers MOV enregistrés sur la carte SD avec “Recording in
DCIM Folder” sur le GY-HM850/GY-HM890 réglé sur “ON” ne
peuvent pas être importés depuis le connecteur USB ou la fente
pour carte SD de cet appareil.
Pour les importer à l’aide de cet appareil, réglez “Recording in
DCIM Folder” sur le GY-HM850/GY-HM890 sur “OFF” avant
l’enregistrement.
Notes on Importing Files Using the LAN Terminal
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
Pour plus d’informations sur la manière de configurer “Recording
in DCIM Folder” sur le GY-HM850/GY-HM890, reportez-vous au
manuel d’instructions du GY-HM850/GY-HM890.
● When performing FTP transfer with multiple files selected, the
files may not be properly imported.
Remarques sur l’importation des fichiers à l’aide
de le connecteur LAN
In this case, try to transfer one file at a time.
● If file transfer is stopped at the FTP client, files that are not
playable may be imported to this unit.
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
These files can be deleted on the Playback Navigation screen
of this unit.
● Lorsque vous effectuez le transfert FTP avec plusieurs
fichiers sélectionnés, les fichiers peuvent ne pas être
importés correctement.
NETWORK SETTING
Dans ce cas, essayez de transférer un fichier à la fois.
● Si le transfert de fichier s’arrête au client FTP, les fichiers qui
ne sont pas lisibles peuvent être importés vers cet appareil.
Ces fichiers peuvent être supprimés sur l’écran Navigation
dans la lecture de cet appareil.
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● FTP user setting has been added to the Settings Menu/
“NETWORK SETTING”.
● The username and password can be set in the “FTP USER
SETTING”.
PARAMETRES RESEAU
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Select “FTP USER SETTING” and press the [OK] button on
the remote control to display the “USERNAME INPUT”
screen.
● Le réglage utilisateur FTP a été ajouté au Menu de Réglages/
“PARAMETRES RESEAU”.
Enter the username and press the colored (*1) button on the
remote control. This confirms the username and the
“PASSWORD INPUT” screen appear.
● Le nom d’utilisateur et le mot de passe peuvent être définis
dans “RÉGLAGE UTILISATEUR FTP”.
Enter the password and press the colored (*1) button on the
remote control. This completes the username and the
password settings.
● Sélectionnez “RÉGLAGE UTILISATEUR FTP” et appuyez sur
la touche [OK] de la télécommande pour afficher l’écran
“SAISIE DU NOM D’UTILISATEUR”.
*1 US: Yellow, EU/AG/ER: Blue
Saisissez le nom d’utilisateur et appuyez sur la touche de
couleur (*1) de la télécommande. Ceci confirme le nom
d’utilisateur et l’écran “SAISIE DU MOT DE PASSE” s’affiche.
Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur la touche de
couleur (*1) de la télécommande. Ceci termine le
paramétrage du nom d’utilisateur et du mot de passe.
● Up to 16 characters can be used for the username and
password.
● The username and password are not set at factory default.
● To reset the username and password that have been set, do
so using “DEFAULT SETTING” in the “SETUP” menu.
*1 US : Jaune, UE/AG/ER : Bleu
Notes on Importing Data from a LAN-compatible
Device to the HDD
● Jusqu’à 16 caractères peuvent être utilisés pour le nom
d’utilisateur et le mot de passe.
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Le nom d’utilisateur et le mot de passe ne sont pas définis à la
sortie d’usine.
● MOV files edited on and exported from Final Cut Pro are not
● Pour réinitialiser le nom d’utilisateur et le mot de passe qui ont
été définis, utilisez “REGLAGE PAR DEFAUT” dans le menu
“CONFIGURATION”.
supported.
B5A-0170-00
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarques sur l’importation de données depuis
un périphérique compatible LAN sur le HDD
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
AJUSTE DE RED
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Se ha añadido el ajuste de usuario FTP al Menú de
configuración/“AJUSTE DE RED”.
● Les fichiers MOV édités sur et exportés depuis Final Cut Pro
● Se pueden ajustar el nombre de usuario y la contraseña en
“CONFIGURACIÓN USUARIO FTP”.
ne sont pas pris en charge.
● Seleccione “CONFIGURACIÓN USUARIO FTP” y pulse el
botón [OK] del mando a distancia para visualizar la pantalla
de “INTRODUCCIÓN DE NOMBRE USUARIO”.
Introduzca el nombre de usuario y pulse el botón de color (*1)
del mando a distancia. Se confirma el nombre de usuario y
aparece la pantalla de “INTRODUCCIÓN DE
CONTRASEÑA”.
Enregistrement à l’aide d’entrées externes
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● L’entrée SDI est mentionnée dans le manuel d’instruction ;
cependant il n’y a pas d’entrée SDI sur cet appareil.
ESPAÑOL
Introduzca la contraseña y pulse el botón de color (*1) del
mando a distancia. De este modo se completa el ajuste del
nombre de usuario y la contraseña.
*1 US: Amarillo, EU/AG/ER: Azul
Notas sobre la grabación directa a discos DVD
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Se puede utilizar hasta un máximo de 16 caracteres para el
● La grabación directa en formato de vídeo DVD a un disco
DVD-R de un solo lado y de doble capa no está permitida.
Es posible la grabación directa en formato de vídeo DVD a un
disco DVD-R de un solo lado y de una capa.
nombre de usuario y la contraseña.
● El nombre de usuario y la contraseña no están configurados
en los ajustes de fábrica.
● Para restablecer el nombre de usuario y la contraseña
configurados, utilice “CONFIG DETERMINADA” en el menú
“CONFIGURACIÓN”.
● Durante la grabación directa en formato de vídeo DVD, los
capítulos asignados durante la grabación (a través de la
operación de pausa, pulsando la tecla de marca, o a través
de la función de marcación automática) no serán válidos
durante la finalización del disco.
Notas sobre la importación de datos desde un
dispositivo compatible con LAN a la unidad de
disco duro
Después de la finalización, los capítulos se asignan
automáticamente a intervalos de 5 a 6 minutos.
●
Para la grabación directa en formato BDMV, los títulos se dividen
en el punto en el que la grabación está en pausa o se cancela.
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Los archivos MOV editados en y exportados desde Final Cut
Pro no son compatibles.
Archivos MOV grabados en la JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM850/GY-HM890
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
Grabar usando entradas externas
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
●
Los archivos MOV grabados en la tarjeta SD con la opción
“Recording in DCIM Folder” en GY-HM850/GY-HM890 ajustada en
“ON”, no se pueden importar desde el terminal USB ni desde la
ranura para tarjetas SD de esta unidad.
● La entrada SDI se menciona en el manual de instrucciones;
sin embargo, no hay entrada SDI en esta unidad.
Para importar mediante esta unidad, ajuste en “Recording in DCIM
Folder” en GY-HM850/GY-HM890 en “OFF” antes de grabar.
Para obtener más información sobre cómo ajustar la opción
“Recording in DCIM Folder” en GY-HM850/GY-HM890, consulte el
manual de instrucciones de GY-HM850/ GY-HM890.
DEUTSCH
Hinweise für die direkte Aufnahme auf DVD-Discs
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Die Aufnahme im DVD-Video-Format auf eine einseitige Dual-
Layer DVD-R-Disc ist nicht zulässig.
Notas sobre la importación de archivos mediante
el terminal LAN
Die Aufnahme im DVD-Video-Format auf eine einseitige
Single-Layer DVD-R-Disc ist zulässig.
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Für die direkte Aufnahme im DVD-Video-Format sind Kapitel,
die während der Aufnahme zugewiesen werden (durch die
Pause-Funktion, Drücken der Markierungstaste oder die
automatische Markierungsfunktion), nicht gültig, wenn die
Disc finalisiert wird.
● Al realizar transferencias FTP con múltiples archivos
seleccionados, los archivos podrían no importarse
correctamente.
En ese caso, intente transferir los archivos uno a uno.
● Si la transferencia de archivos se detiene en el cliente FTP,
los archivos no aptos para reproducción podrán importarse a
esta unidad.
Nach der Finalisierung werden automatisch Kapitel im
Abstand von 5 bis 6 Minuten zugewiesen.
● Für direkte Aufnahmen im BDMV-Format werden die Titel an
dem Punkt geteilt, an dem die Aufnahme unterbrochen oder
abgebrochen wurde.
Estos archivos pueden eliminarse desde la pantalla Playback
Navigation de esta unidad.
Auf dem JVC ProHD MEMORY CARD CAMERA
RECORDER GY-HM850/GY-HM890 aufgenommene
MOV-Dateien
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Die MOV-Dateien, die auf der SD-Karte mit „Recording in
DCIM Folder“ auf „ON“ festgelegter Option auf dem
GY-HM850/GY-HM890 aufgenommen wurden, können nicht
vom USB-Abschluss oder dem SD-Kartenschlitz dieses
Geräts importiert werden.
Um den Import mithilfe dieses Geräts zu ermöglichen, legen
Sie vor der Aufnahme die Option „Recording in DCIM Folder“
auf dem GY-HM850/GY-HM890 auf „OFF“ fest.
Die Einzelheiten zur Einstellung der Option „Recording in
DCIM Folder“ auf dem GY-HM850/GY-HM890 finden Sie in
der Bedienungsanleitung des GY-HM850/GY-HM890.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hinweise zum Importieren von Dateien mithilfe des
LAN-Anschlusses
File MOV registrati sulla JVC ProHD MEMORY
CARD CAMERA RECORDER GY-HM850/GY-HM890
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Wenn Sie die FTP-Übertragung mit mehreren ausgewählten
Dateien ausführen, werden die Dateien möglicherweise nicht
ordnungsgemäß importiert.
● I file MOV che sono stati registrati sulla scheda SD con
“Recording in DCIM Folder” su GY-HM850/GY-HM890
impostato su “ON” non possono essere importati dal
terminale USB o dall’alloggiamento per scheda SD di questa
unità.
Versuchen Sie in diesem Fall, die Dateien einzeln zu
übertragen.
● Wenn die Dateiübertragung am FTP-Client angehalten wird,
werden möglicherweise Dateien, die nicht wiedergegeben
werden können, auf dieses Gerät importiert.
Diese Dateien können auf dem
Per importare utilizzando questa unità, impostare “Recording
in DCIM Folder” su GY-HM850/GY-HM890 su “OFF” prima
della registrazione.
Per dettagli su come impostare “Recording in DCIM Folder”
su GY-HM850/GY-HM890, fare riferimento al manuale di
istruzioni di GY-HM850/GY-HM890.
Wiedergabenavigationsbildschirm dieses Geräts gelöscht
werden.
NETZWERKEINSTELLUNG
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
Note sull’importazione di file utilizzando il
terminale LAN
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Die FTP-Benutzereinstellung wurde zum Einstellungsmenü/
„NETZWERKEINSTELLUNG“ hinzugefügt.
● Quando si esegue il trasferimento FTP con più file selezionati,
i file potrebbero non venire importati correttamente.
In questo caso, cercare di trasferire un file alla volta.
● Se il trasferimento dei file viene arrestato al client FTP,
potrebbero essere importati in questa unità file che non sono
riproducibili.
● Der Benutzername und das Passwort kann in der „FTP-
BENUTZEREINSTELLUNG“ festgelegt werden.
● Wählen Sie „FTP-BENUTZEREINSTELLUNG“ und drücken
Sie die [OK]-Taste auf der Fernbedienung, um den Bildschirm
„BENUTZERNAMEN EINGEBEN“ anzuzeigen.
Geben Sie den Benutzernamen ein und drücken Sie die
Farbtaste (*1) auf der Fernbedienung. Der Benutzername
wird bestätigt und der Bildschirm „PASSWORT EINGEBEN“
erscheint.
I file possono essere eliminati sulla schermata di navigazione
di questa unità.
IMPOSTAZIONE DI RETE
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
Geben Sie das Passwort ein und drücken Sie die Farbtaste
(*1) auf der Fernbedienung. Damit sind die Einstellungen des
Benutzernamens und des Passworts abgeschlossen.
● L’impostazione utente FTP è stata aggiunta al menu
Impostazioni/“IMPOSTAZIONE DI RETE”.
*1 US: Gelb, EU/AG/ER: Blau
● Il nome utente e la password possono essere impostati in
“IMPOSTAZIONE UTENTE FTP”.
● Für den Benutzernamen und das Passwort können bis zu 16
Zeichen verwendet werden.
● Selezionare “IMPOSTAZIONE UTENTE FTP” e premere il
pulsante [OK] sul telecomando per visualizzare la schermata
“IMMISSIONE NOME UTENTE”.
● Der Benutzername und das Passwort sind werkseitig nicht
eingestellt.
● Verwenden Sie „STANDARDEINSTELLUNGEN“ im Menü
„EINSTELLUNGEN“, um den festgelegten Benutzernamen
und das Passwort zurückzusetzen.
Immettere il nome utente e premere il pulsante colorato (*1)
sul telecomando. Ciò conferma il nome utente, quindi appare
la schermata “IMMISSIONE PASSWORD”.
Immettere la password e premere il pulsante colorato (*1) sul
telecomando. Ciò completa le impostazioni del nome utente e
della password.
Hinweise zum Importieren von Daten von einem
netzwerkfähigen Gerät auf die HDD
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
*1 US: Giallo, UE/AG/ER: Blu
● Von Final Cut Pro bearbeitete und exportierte MOV-Dateien
● Possono essere utilizzati fino a 16 caratteri per il nome utente
werden nicht unterstützt.
e la password.
● Il nome utente e la password non sono impostati su valori
predefiniti in fabbrica.
Aufnahme über externe Eingänge
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● Per ripristinare il nome utente e la password che sono stati
impostati, farlo usando “IMPOSTAZIONI PREDEFINITE” nel
menu “IMPOSTAZIONI”.
● In der Bedienungsanleitung wird ein SDI-Eingang erwähnt, es
gibt jedoch keinen SDI-Eingang an diesem Gerät.
Note sull’importazione di dati da un dispositivo
compatibile LAN all’HDD
ITALIANO
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
Note sulla registrazione diretta su dischi DVD
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
● I file MOV modificati su Final Cut Pro e esportati dallo stesso
non sono supportati.
● La registrazione diretta in formato DVD-Video su un disco
DVD-R dual layer a lato unico non è ammessa.
Registrazione tramite ingressi esterni
(SR-HD1700US/EU/AG/ER)
La registrazione diretta in formato DVD-Video su un disco
DVD-R single layer a lato unico è ammessa.
● L’ingresso SDI è indicato nel manuale di istruzioni; tuttavia,
● Per registrare direttamente in formato DVD-Video, i capitoli
che vengono assegnati durante la registrazione (attraverso la
messa in pausa, premendo il tasto Mark o la funzione Auto
Marking) non saranno validi mentre il disco viene finalizzato.
Dopo la finalizzazione, i capitoli vengono assegnati
automaticamente a intervalli da 5 a 6 minuti.
non vi è alcun ingresso SDI su questa unità.
● Per registrare direttamente in formato BDMV, i titoli sono divisi
nel punto in cui la registrazione è messa in pausa o
disattivata.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Others
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LST1562-001A
© 2014 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
IOGear Switch GCS1762 User Manual
JBL Speaker E150P User Manual
JVC Car Stereo System GET0137 001A User Manual
JVC CRT Television AV29BF10ENS User Manual
JVC Portable Speaker SP CR500 User Manual
Kenmore Refrigerator 2220698 User Manual
Kicker Speaker CVT12 User Manual
KitchenAid Range W10246119C User Manual
KitchenAid Washer 434 User Manual
Kodak Digital Camera 1278829 User Manual